Special Publication 800-97 

Establishing Wireless 

Robust Security Networks: 

A Guide to IEEE 802.11i 

Recommendations of the National Institute 

of Standards and Technology 

Sheila Frankel 

Bernard Eydt 

Les Owens 

Karen Scarfone 

Establishing Wireless Robust Security 

Networks: A Guide to IEEE 802.11i 

Recommendations of the National 

Institute of Standards and Technology 

Sheila Frankel, Bernard Eydt, 

Les Owens, Karen Scarfone 

NIST Special Publication 800-97 

C O M P U T E R S E C U R I T Y

Computer Security Division 

Information Technology Laboratory 

National Institute of Standards and Technology 

Gaithersburg, MD 20899-8930 

February 2007 

U.S. Department of Commerce 

Carlos M. Gutierrez, Secretary 

Technology Administration 

Robert C. Cresanti, Under Secretary of Commerce 

for Technology 

National Institute of Standards and Technology

William Jeffrey, Director 
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Reports on Computer Systems Technology 

The Information Technology Laboratory (ITL) at the National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(NIST) promotes the U.S. economy and public welfare by providing technical leadership for the nation’s 

measurement and standards infrastructure. ITL develops tests, test methods, reference data, proof of 

concept implementations, and technical analysis to advance the development and productive use of 

information technology. ITL’s responsibilities include the development of technical, physical, 

administrative, and management standards and guidelines for the cost-effective security and privacy of 

sensitive unclassified information in Federal computer systems. This Special Publication 800-series 

reports on ITL’s research, guidance, and outreach efforts in computer security and its collaborative 

activities with industry, government, and academic organizations. 

Certain commercial entities, equipment, or materials may be identified in this 

document in order to describe an experimental procedure or concept adequately. 

Such identification is not intended to imply recommendation or endorsement by the 

National Institute of Standards and Technology, nor is it intended to imply that the 

entities, materials, or equipment are necessarily the best available for the purpose. 

National Institute of Standards and Technology Special Publication 800-97 

Natl. Inst. Stand. Technol. Spec. Publ. 800-97, 162 pages (February 2007) 

ii
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Acknowledgements 

The authors, Sheila Frankel and Karen Scarfone of the National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(NIST), and Bernard Eydt and Les Owens of Booz Allen Hamilton, wish to thank their colleagues who 

reviewed drafts of this document and contributed to its technical content. The authors would like to 

acknowledge Tim Grance, Lily Chen, Tim Polk and Randy Easter of NIST, and Alexis Feringa, Thomas 

Fuhrman, and Marc Stevens of Booz Allen Hamilton, for their keen and insightful assistance throughout 

the development of the document. The authors appreciate the detailed, perceptive in-depth comments 

provided by wireless experts Matthew Gast, Jesse Walker (Intel) and Nancy Cam-Winget (Cisco). The 

authors would also like to express their thanks to Bernard Aboba (Microsoft), Randy Chou (Aruba 

Networks), Ryon Coleman (3e Technologies), Paul Dodd (Boeing), Dean Farrington (Wells Fargo), Ben 

Halpert (Lockheed Martin), Criss Hyde, Timothy Kramer (Joint Systems Integration Command), W. J. 

Miller (MaCT), and Robert Smith (Juniper Networks) for their particularly valuable comments and 

suggestions. 

Trademark Information 

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft 

Corporation in the United States and other countries. 

Cisco and Cisco IOS are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain 

other countries. 

Wi-Fi CERTIFIED is a trademark the Wi-Fi Alliance. 

All other names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. 

iii
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table of Contents 

Executive Summary..............................................................................................................ES-1

1. Introduction ......................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Authority...................................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Purpose and Scope .................................................................................................1-1

1.3 Audience..................................................................................................................1-1

1.4 Document Structure .................................................................................................1-1

1.5 How to Navigate This Document .............................................................................1-2

2. Overview of Wireless Networking ..................................................................................2-1

2.1 History of Wireless Networking Standards...............................................................2-1

2.1.1 IEEE 802.11 Standards ................................................................................2-1

2.1.2 Wi-Fi Alliance Certification............................................................................2-2

2.1.3 Other Wireless Standards ............................................................................2-3

2.2 IEEE 802.11 Network Components and Architectural Models.................................2-4

2.2.1 Ad Hoc Mode................................................................................................2-4

2.2.2 Infrastructure Mode ......................................................................................2-6

2.3 Summary..................................................................................................................2-6

3. Overview of IEEE 802.11 Security ..................................................................................3-1

3.1 WLAN Security Concerns ........................................................................................3-1

3.2 History of Pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 Security ...............................................................3-2

3.2.1 Access Control and Authentication...............................................................3-2

3.2.2 Encryption.....................................................................................................3-4

3.2.3 Data Integrity ................................................................................................3-5

3.2.4 Replay Protection .........................................................................................3-6

3.2.5 Availability.....................................................................................................3-6

3.3 Brief Overview of IEEE 802.11i Security..................................................................3-6

3.4 Summary..................................................................................................................3-9

4. Security Framework for Robust Security Networks .....................................................4-1

4.1 Features of RSNs ....................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Key Hierarchies and Key Distribution and Management .........................................4-3

4.2.1 Pairwise Key Hierarchy ................................................................................4-4

4.2.2 Group Key Hierarchy ....................................................................................4-7

4.3 Overview of RSN Data Confidentiality and Integrity Protocols ................................4-7

4.3.1 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)........................................................4-8

4.3.2 Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining MAC Protocol (CCMP)............4-10

4.4 Summary................................................................................................................4-14

5. Robust Security Networks Principles of Operation......................................................5-1

5.1 General Principles of IEEE 802.11 Operation..........................................................5-1

5.1.1 IEEE 802.11 Frame Types ...........................................................................5-1

5.1.2 IEEE 802.11 Data Frame Structure..............................................................5-3

5.2 Phases of IEEE 802.11 RSN Operation ..................................................................5-5

5.3 Discovery Phase ......................................................................................................5-6

5.3.1 Establishing a Security Policy.......................................................................5-7

5.3.2 Discovery Phase Frame Flows.....................................................................5-9

iv
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

5.3.3 Distinguishing RSN and Pre-RSN WLANs .................................................5-11

5.4 Authentication Phase .............................................................................................5-12

5.4.1 The IEEE 802.1X Framework: Port-Based Access Control........................5-12

5.4.2 Authentication with the PSK .......................................................................5-14

5.4.3 AS to AP Connections ................................................................................5-15

5.4.4 Pre-Authentication and PMKSA Caching ...................................................5-17

5.5 Key Generation and Distribution ............................................................................5-18

5.5.1 4-Way Handshake......................................................................................5-18

5.5.2 Group Key Handshake ...............................................................................5-19

5.6 Protected Data Exchange ......................................................................................5-20

5.7 Connection Termination.........................................................................................5-21

5.8 Summary................................................................................................................5-21

6. Extensible Authentication Protocol ...............................................................................6-1

6.1 EAP Methods ...........................................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 EAP Method Requirements for WLANs........................................................6-2

6.1.2 RFC 3748-Defined EAP Methods.................................................................6-4

6.1.3 TLS-Based EAP Methods.............................................................................6-6

6.1.4 Summary of EAP Methods and Security Claims ........................................6-11

6.2 Developing an EAP Method Strategy ....................................................................6-12

6.3 EAP Security Considerations.................................................................................6-12

6.3.1 Secure STA Configuration..........................................................................6-14

6.3.2 Unprotected Links.......................................................................................6-14

6.3.3 Attacks on the Authentication Server .........................................................6-16

6.4 EAP Multiplexing Model and Related Support Requirements................................6-16

6.5 Summary................................................................................................................6-18

7. FIPS and WLAN Product Certifications .........................................................................7-1

7.1 FIPS 140-2 Certification...........................................................................................7-1

7.2 Wi-Fi Alliance Certification Programs ......................................................................7-2

7.3 Wi-Fi Alliance Network Security Certifications .........................................................7-2

7.3.1 WPA Features ..............................................................................................7-3

7.3.2 WPA2 Features ............................................................................................7-3

7.3.3 Modes of Operation......................................................................................7-4

7.4 Summary..................................................................................................................7-4

8. WLAN Security Best Practices .......................................................................................8-1

9. Case Studies.....................................................................................................................9-1

9.1 Case Study 1: First Time WLAN Deployment..........................................................9-1

9.1.1 Phase 1: Initiation.........................................................................................9-1

9.1.2 Phase 2: Acquisition/Development...............................................................9-2

9.1.3 Phase 3: Implementation..............................................................................9-5

9.1.4 Phase 4: Operations/Maintenance ...............................................................9-6

9.1.5 Summary and Evaluation .............................................................................9-6

9.2 Case Study 2: Transitioning an Existing WLAN Infrastructure to RSN Technology.9-6

9.2.1 Phase 1: Initiation.........................................................................................9-7

9.2.2 The Interim Solution: Acquisition/Development and Implementation ...........9-9

9.2.3 The Long-term Solution: Acquisition/Development and Implementation....9-13

9.2.4 Summary and Evaluation ...........................................................................9-17

9.3 Case Study 3: Supporting Users Who Are Not Employees ...................................9-18

v
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

9.3.1 Phase 1: Initiation.......................................................................................9-18

9.3.2 Phase 2: Acquisition/Development.............................................................9-21

9.3.3 Summary and Evaluation ...........................................................................9-23

10. Summary of Concepts and Recommendations ..........................................................10-1

10.1 IEEE 802.11 Concepts...........................................................................................10-1

10.2 IEEE 802.11i Security Overview ............................................................................10-1

10.3 Wi-Fi Alliance Product Certification Programs .......................................................10-3

10.4 IEEE 802.11 RSN Operation .................................................................................10-3

10.5 Life Cycle for IEEE 802.11 RSN Deployment ........................................................10-5

10.6 Additional WLAN Security Recommendations.......................................................10-5

11. Future Directions ...........................................................................................................11-1

11.1 IEEE 802.11r: Fast Roaming/Fast BSS Transition ................................................11-1

11.2 IEEE 802.11w: Protected Management Frames....................................................11-1

List of Appendices 

Appendix A— Acronyms........................................................................................................ A-1

Appendix B— References ...................................................................................................... B-1

Appendix C— Online Resources........................................................................................... C-1

List of Figures 

Figure 2-1. IEEE 802.11 Ad Hoc Mode.....................................................................................2-5

Figure 2-2. IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure Mode ...........................................................................2-5

Figure 2-3. Extended Service Set in an Enterprise...................................................................2-6

Figure 3-1. Shared Key Authentication Message Flow.............................................................3-3

Figure 3-2. Conceptual View of Authentication Server in a Network ........................................3-8

Figure 3-3. IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control...............................................................3-9

Figure 4-1. Taxonomy for Pre-RSN and RSN Security.............................................................4-1

Figure 4-2. Security in Ad Hoc and Infrastructure Modes .........................................................4-2

Figure 4-3. Cryptographic Algorithms Used in IEEE 802.11.....................................................4-3

Figure 4-4. Pairwise Key Hierarchy ..........................................................................................4-5

Figure 4-5. Out-of-Band Key Distribution for the PSK ...............................................................4-6

Figure 4-6. Group Key Hierarchy ..............................................................................................4-7

Figure 4-7. CCMP Encapsulation Block Diagram ...................................................................4-12

Figure 4-8. CCMP Decapsulation Block Diagram...................................................................4-13

Figure 5-1. Typical Two-Frame IEEE 802.11 Communication..................................................5-1

vi
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 5-2. Multi-STA WLAN Flow Diagram .............................................................................5-3

Figure 5-3. IEEE 802.11 Frame Format....................................................................................5-4

Figure 5-4. Five Phases of Operation .......................................................................................5-6

Figure 5-5. Beacons Used During the Discovery Phases in an ESS........................................5-7

Figure 5-6. Fields of the RSN Information Element ..................................................................5-9

Figure 5-7. Discovery Phase Frame Flows.............................................................................5-10

Figure 5-8. Conceptual Example of Security Policy Negotiation.............................................5-11

Figure 5-9. Concept of Authentication ....................................................................................5-12

Figure 5-10. Authentication Phase of Operation.....................................................................5-14

Figure 5-11. Differences in the Five Phases when a PSK Is Used.........................................5-15

Figure 5-12. AP to AS Communication ...................................................................................5-16

Figure 5-13. Typical Enterprise with Multiple APs, STAs, and an AS.....................................5-17

Figure 5-14. 4-Way Handshake ..............................................................................................5-19

Figure 5-15. Group Key Handshake .......................................................................................5-20

Figure 6-1. Illustration of EAP-TLS Environment ......................................................................6-8

Figure 6-2. Illustration of EAP-TTLS Environment....................................................................6-9

Figure 6-3. Certificate Properties Dialog Box..........................................................................6-15

Figure 6-4. Standard IEEE 802.11 RSN Authentication Infrastructure ...................................6-16

Figure 6-5. EAP Traffic Flow in IEEE 802.11 RSN .................................................................6-17

Figure 9-1. Agency XYZ WLAN .................................................................................................9-4

Figure 9-2. BAR WLAN Infrastructure Prior to Transition Effort.................................................9-8

Figure 9-3. BAR WLAN Interim Solution..................................................................................9-12

Figure 9-4. BAR WLAN at Completion of RSN Migration Project ............................................9-16

Figure 9-5. GRC WLAN Infrastructure .....................................................................................9-22

List of Tables 

Table 2-1. Summary of IEEE 802.11 WLAN Technologies ......................................................2-2

Table 3-1. Major Threats against LAN Security ........................................................................3-2

Table 4-1. Summary of Keys Used for Data Confidentiality and Integrity Protocols .................4-8

Table 4-2. Summary of Data Confidentiality and Integrity Protocols.......................................4-15

Table 5-1. IEEE 802.11 Management Frame Subtypes ...........................................................5-2

Table 5-2. MAC Header Address Field Functions for Data Frames .........................................5-5

Table 6-1. Security Claims for EAP Methods Used in WLANs (Part 1 of 2) .............................6-3

Table 6-1. Security Claims for EAP Methods Used in WLANs (Part 2 of 2) .............................6-4

vii
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 6-2. Summary of Security Claims for Selected EAP Methods ......................................6-11

Table 6-3. Characteristics of Common TLS-Based EAP Methods for WLANs .......................6-12

Table 6-4. Questions for Identifying an Appropriate EAP Method ..........................................6-13

Table 6-5. EAP Multiplexing Model.........................................................................................6-16

Table 6-6. EAP Support Requirements for WLAN Components.............................................6-18

Table 7-1. Wi-Fi Alliance Certification Programs ......................................................................7-2

Table 7-2. IEEE 802.11i Features Not Present in WPA............................................................7-3

Table 8-1. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Initiation Phase............................................8-3

Table 8-2. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Planning and Design Phase ........................8-7

Table 8-3. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Procurement Phase...................................8-10

Table 8-4. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Implementation Phase...............................8-14

Table 8-5. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Operations/Maintenance Phase ................8-16

Table 8-6. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Disposition Phase......................................8-18

Table 9-1. BAR WLAN Components Prior to Transition Effort..................................................9-9

Table 9-2. Interim WLAN Strategy for BAR ............................................................................9-10

Table 9-3. AP Specifications in BAR WLAN Interim Solution .................................................9-13

Table 9-4. BAR WLAN at Completion of RSN Migration Project ............................................9-17

Table 9-5. Proposed WLAN Architecture and Security Strategy ............................................9-18

viii
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Executive Summary 

A wireless local area network (WLAN) enables access to computing resources for devices that are not 

physically connected to a network. WLANs typically operate over a fairly limited range, such as an 

office building or building campus, and usually are implemented as extensions to existing wired local area 

networks to enhance user mobility. This guide seeks to assist organizations in better understanding the 

most commonly used family of standards for WLANs—Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 

(IEEE) 802.11—focusing on the security enhancements introduced in the IEEE 802.11i amendment. In 

particular, this guide explains the security features and provides specific recommendations to ensure the 

security of the operating environment. 

Before IEEE 802.11i was finalized, IEEE 802.11 relied on a security method known as Wired Equivalent 

Privacy (WEP), which has several well-documented security problems. The IEEE 802.11i amendment 

introduces a range of new security features that are designed to overcome the shortcomings of WEP. It 

introduces the concept of a Robust Security Network (RSN), which is defined as a wireless security 

network that allows the creation of Robust Security Network Associations (RSNA) only. RSNAs are 

wireless connections that provide moderate to high levels of assurance against WLAN security threats 

through use of a variety of cryptographic techniques. This guide describes the operation of RSNs, 

including the steps needed to establish an RSNA and the flows of information between RSN components. 

The three types of RSN components are stations (STA), which are wireless endpoint devices such as 

laptops and wireless handheld devices (e.g. PDAs, text messaging devices and smart phones); access 

points (AP), which are network devices that allow STAs to communicate wirelessly and to connect to 

another network, typically an organization’s wired infrastructure; and authentication servers (AS), which 

provide authentication services to STAs. STAs and APs are also found in pre-RSN WLANs, but ASs are 

a new WLAN component introduced by the RSN framework. 

NIST recommends that Federal agencies implement the following recommendations to assist in 

establishing and maintaining robust security for their IEEE 802.11i-based WLANs. Personnel 

responsible for their implementation and maintenance should read the corresponding sections of the 

document to ensure they have an adequate understanding of important related issues. 

This publication covers IEEE 802.11i-based wireless LANs only. It does not replace NIST Special 

Publication (SP) 800-48, Wireless Network Security: 802.11, Bluetooth and Handheld Devices, which 

addresses IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g-based wireless LANs, Bluetooth implementations, and wireless 

handheld devices (e.g., text messaging devices, PDAs, smart phones). Organizations with existing IEEE 

802.11b or 802.11g implementations should continue to use the recommendations in SP 800-48 to secure 

them; they should also review this publication to understand the new IEEE 802.11i technology and how it 

addresses the shortcomings of the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol used to secure IEEE 

802.11b and 802.11g networks. Organizations that are considering the deployment of new wireless LANs 

should be evaluating IEEE 802.11i-based products and following the recommendations for IEEE 802.11i 

implementations in this publication. 

Organizations should ensure that all WLAN components use Federal Information Processing 

Standards (FIPS)-approved cryptographic algorithms to protect the confidentiality and integrity of 

WLAN communications. 

The IEEE 802.11i amendment defines two data confidentiality and integrity protocols for RSNAs: 

Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) and Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message 

Authentication Code Protocol (CCMP). This guide discusses both protocols at length, as well as the 

cryptographic keys created and used by these protocols. Federal agencies are required to use 

ES-1 
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms that are contained in FIPS-validated cryptographic modules.1

 

Of WEP, TKIP, and CCMP, only CCMP uses a core cryptographic algorithm that is FIPS-approved, the 

Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). For other security features, CCMP offers stronger assurance than 

WEP and TKIP. Accordingly, NIST requires the use of CCMP for securing Federal agencies’ IEEE 

802.11-based WLANs. For legacy IEEE 802.11 equipment that does not provide CCMP, auxiliary 

security protection is required; one possibility is the use of an IPsec VPN, using FIPS-approved 

cryptographic algorithms. NIST SP 800-48 contains specific recommendations for securing legacy IEEE 

802.11 implementations. 

Organizations should select IEEE 802.11 RSN authentication methods for their environment 

carefully. 

IEEE 802.11 RSN uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) for the authentication phase of 

establishing an RSNA. EAP supports a wide variety of authentication methods, also called EAP methods. 

They include authentication based on passwords, certificates, smart cards, and tokens. EAP methods also 

can include combinations of authentication techniques, such as a certificate followed by a password, or 

the option of using either a smart card or a token. This flexibility allows EAP to integrate with nearly any 

environment to which a WLAN might connect. Organizations have considerable discretion in choosing 

which EAP methods to employ; a poor EAP method choice or implementation could seriously weaken an 

IEEE 802.11 RSN’s protections. 

Because of the extensible nature of EAP, dozens of EAP methods exist, and others are being developed 

continually. However, many EAP methods do not satisfy the necessary security requirements for 

WLANs; for example, EAP methods that do not generate cryptographic keying material cannot be used 

for WLANs. In general, the current EAP methods that can satisfy WLAN security requirements are based 

on the Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol. A primary distinction between TLS-based EAP methods 

is the level of public key infrastructure (PKI) support required; the EAP-TLS method requires an 

enterprise PKI implementation and certificates deployed to each STA, while most other TLS methods 

require certificates on each AS only. Organizations should use the EAP-TLS method whenever possible. 

Because some EAP methods are not yet official standards and new methods are being developed, 

organizations are encouraged to obtain the latest available information on EAP methods and standards 

when planning an IEEE 802.11 RSN implementation. Additionally, organizations should ensure that the 

cryptographic modules implementing the TLS algorithm for each product under consideration are FIPSvalidated. 

Before selecting WLAN equipment, organizations should review their existing identity management 

infrastructure, authentication requirements, and security policy to determine the EAP method or methods 

that are most appropriate in their environments, then purchase systems that support the chosen EAP 

methods, and implement and maintain them carefully. This publication provides detailed guidance on 

planning EAP implementations. It discusses the most common EAP methods, explains how organizations 

can select EAP methods, and examines additional EAP security considerations. 

 

1

 Information about NIST’s Cryptographic Module Validation program can be found at http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/140-

2.htm. FIPS PUB 140-2 (http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips140-2/fips1402.pdf) describes the generic security 

requirements; the implementation guide (http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/140-1/FIPS1402IG.pdf) includes specific 

implementation guidance for IEEE 802.11. Lists of FIPS-approved cryptographic products can be found at 

http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/140-1/1401val.htm. 

ES-2 
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Organizations should integrate their existing authentication technology with their IEEE 802.11 

RSN WLAN to the extent feasible. 

Although the RSN framework supports the use of pre-shared keys (PSK), organizations should choose to 

implement the IEEE 802.1X standard and EAP for authentication instead of using PSKs because of the 

resources needed for proper PSK administration and the security risks involved. IEEE 802.1X and EAP 

authentication requires an organization to use an AS, which may necessitate the use of a PKI. An 

organization that already has ASs for Web, e-mail, file and print services, and other authentication needs, 

should consider integrating this technology into its RSN solution. Most leading network operating 

systems and directory solutions offer the support needed for RSN integration. 

Organizations should ensure that the confidentiality and integrity of communications between 

access points and authentication servers are protected sufficiently. 

The data confidentiality and integrity protocol (such as CCMP) used by an IEEE 802.11 RSN protects 

communications between STAs and APs. However, IEEE 802.11 and its related standards explicitly state 

that protection of the communications between the AP and AS is out of their scope. Therefore, 

organizations deploying RSNs should ensure that communications between each AP and its 

corresponding ASs are protected sufficiently through cryptography. Also, because of the importance of 

the ASs, organizations should pay particular attention to establishing and maintaining their security 

through operating system configuration, firewall rules, and other security controls. 

Organizations establishing IEEE 802.11 RSNs should use technologies that have the appropriate 

security certification from NIST and interoperability certification from the Wi-Fi Alliance. 

To implement IEEE 802.11 RSNs, organizations may need to update or replace existing IEEE 802.11 

equipment and software that cannot support RSNAs, as well as purchase additional equipment. The 

Wi-Fi Alliance, a non-profit industry consortium of WLAN equipment and software vendors, has 

established the Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) certification program to give consumers of WLAN 

products assurance that their IEEE 802.11i systems can interoperate with similar equipment from other 

vendors. Federal agencies should procure WPA2 products that use FIPS-approved encryption algorithms 

and have been FIPS-validated. Organizations that plan to use authentication servers as part of their IEEE 

802.11 RSN implementations should procure products with the WPA2 Enterprise level certification. 

Also, because the WPA2 certification is expanded periodically to test for interoperability with additional 

EAP methods, organizations should obtain the latest WPA2 information before making procurement 

decisions. 

Organizations should ensure that WLAN security considerations are incorporated into each phase 

of the WLAN life cycle when establishing and maintaining IEEE 802.11 RSNs. 

This guide presents extensive guidance on IEEE 802.11 RSN planning and implementation. It describes a 

life cycle model for WLANs and presents best practice recommendations related to WLAN security for 

each phase in the life cycle. WLAN security considerations for each phase include the following: 

 Phase 1: Initiation. This phase includes the tasks that an organization should perform before it 

starts to design its WLAN solution. These include developing a WLAN use policy, performing a 

WLAN risk assessment, and specifying business and functional requirements for the solution, 

such as mandating RSNAs for all WLAN connections. 

 Phase 2: Acquisition/Development. For the purposes of this guide, the 

Acquisition/Development phase is split into the following two phases: 

ES-3 
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

– Phase 2a: Planning and Design. In this phase, WLAN network architects specify the 

technical characteristics of the WLAN solution, such as authentication methods, and related 

network components, such as firewall rulesets. The WLAN network architects should also 

conduct a site survey to help determine the architecture of the solution and how the WLAN 

should be integrated with the existing authentication infrastructure, including PKI. 

– Phase 2b: Procurement. This phase involves specifying the number and type of WLAN 

components that must be purchased, the feature sets they must support (e.g., FIPS-validated 

encryption modules), and any certifications they must hold (e.g., WPA2 Enterprise). 

 Phase 3: Implementation. In this phase, procured equipment is first configured to meet 

operational and security requirements, and then installed and activated on a production network, 

with appropriate event logging enabled. 

 Phase 4: Operations/Maintenance. This phase includes security-related tasks that an 

organization should perform on an ongoing basis once the WLAN is operational, including 

patching, periodic security assessment, log reviews, and incident handling. 

 Phase 5: Disposition. This phase encompasses tasks that occur after a system or its components 

have been retired, including preserving information to meet legal requirements, sanitizing media 

that might contain sensitive material, and disposing of equipment properly. 

ES-4 
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

1. Introduction 

1.1 Authority 

The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) developed this document in furtherance of its 

statutory responsibilities under the Federal Information Security Management Act (FISMA) of 2002, 

Public Law 107-347. 

NIST is responsible for developing standards and guidelines, including minimum requirements, for 

providing adequate information security for all agency operations and assets; but such standards and 

guidelines shall not apply to national security systems. This guideline is consistent with the requirements 

of the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) Circular A-130, Section 8b(3), “Securing Agency 

Information Systems,” as analyzed in A-130, Appendix IV: Analysis of Key Sections. Supplemental 

information is provided in A-130, Appendix III. 

This guideline has been prepared for use by Federal agencies. It may be used by nongovernmental 

organizations on a voluntary basis and is not subject to copyright, though attribution is desired. 

Nothing in this document should be taken to contradict standards and guidelines made mandatory and 

binding on Federal agencies by the Secretary of Commerce under statutory authority, nor should these 

guidelines be interpreted as altering or superseding the existing authorities of the Secretary of Commerce, 

Director of the OMB, or any other Federal official. 

1.2 Purpose and Scope 

This publication seeks to assist organizations in understanding, selecting, and implementing technologies 

based on Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11i, part of the IEEE 802.11 family 

of wireless networking standards.2

 The document explains at length the security features and capabilities 

associated with IEEE 802.11i through its framework for Robust Security Networks (RSN), and provides 

extensive guidance on the planning and deployment of RSNs. The document also discusses previous 

IEEE 802.11 security measures and their shortcomings. 

1.3 Audience 

This document has been created for those who are responsible for ensuring the security of wireless local 

area networks (WLAN). The guide should also be useful for network and security engineers and 

administrators who are responsible for designing, implementing, securing, and maintaining IEEE 802.11i 

implementations. 

1.4 Document Structure 

The remainder of this document is organized into the following nine major sections: 

 Section 2 provides an overview of wireless networking, focusing on the IEEE 802.11 family of 

WLAN standards, and explains the basic IEEE 802.11 WLAN components and architectural 

models. 

 

2

 By the end of 2006, 802.11i will no longer exist, because it is being rolled into the base standard. At that time, the reference 

is expected to be IEEE 802.11:2006. 

1-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Section 3 gives an overview of IEEE 802.11 security, including a review of the security features 

and weaknesses of IEEE 802.11 before the introduction of the IEEE 802.11i amendment. It also 

introduces the major security-related components that are defined in IEEE 802.11i. 

 Section 4 introduces the concepts of Robust Security Networks (RSN) and Robust Security 

Network Associations (RSNA). It also discusses the RSN data confidentiality and integrity 

protocols, and the cryptographic keys created and used by these protocols. 

 Section 5 describes the five phases that occur during RSN communication, starting with the 

discovery of a WLAN and ending in connection termination. It also discusses the types of frames 

used to carry information between RSN components, and depicts the flows of frames between 

components during each phase of RSN operation. 

 Section 6 provides guidance on planning an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) 

implementation, which is necessary for most enterprise RSN deployments. It discusses the most 

common EAP methods, explains how organizations can select EAP methods appropriate to their 

environments, examines additional EAP security considerations, and introduces the EAP 

architectural model and related support requirements. 

 Section 7 describes FIPS 140-2 certification as it applies to 802.11 wireless networks. It also 

provides an overview of the security specifications developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which 

conducts a certification program for the interoperability of WLAN products. The certifications 

are intended to help organizations select WLAN products that can support RSNs. 

 Section 8 presents best practice recommendations related to WLAN security. 

 Section 9 presents three case studies that illustrate how organizations might plan, design, and 

implement RSNs in different scenarios, such as migrating a WLAN from pre-RSN to RSN 

technology, and designing a new WLAN that meets RSN requirements. 

 Section 10 summarizes the major concepts and recommendations presented in Sections 2 through 

8 of the document. 

 Section 11 provides a brief overview of possible extensions to IEEE 802.11i that are currently 

being developed. 

The document also contains appendices with supporting material. Appendix A contains an acronym list. 

Appendix B lists the document’s references and other sources of information that may be of interest to 

readers. Appendix C identifies online resources that may be helpful for better understanding IEEE 

802.11i and IEEE 802.11i security. 

1.5 How to Navigate This Document 

This document is intended to be used by readers with various levels of experience and technical 

knowledge, as well as different interests in IEEE 802.11i. For example, computer security program 

managers might want to learn the basic IEEE 802.11i concepts and terminology, while network and 

security engineers might want to know as many details about the technical configuration of IEEE 802.11i 

technologies as possible. The lists below provide general recommendations as to which sections and subsections of the guide should be read, based on the reader’s objectives. Readers who are unsure about the 

relevance or appropriateness of a particular section should read its introduction and summary to gain a 

better understanding of what the section contains. 

1-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Practical Guidance on Implementing IEEE 802.11i Security. Readers who want to know how 

to implement IEEE 802.11i security should read Sections 7 and 8, as well as the Section 9 case 

studies that most closely match their needs. 

 Basic Knowledge of IEEE 802.11i and RSNs. Readers who want to understand the basics of 

IEEE 802.11i and RSNs, and are not interested in detailed technical explanations of protocols and 

RSN operation, should do the following: 

– Read Sections 2 and 3. 

– Skim Sections 4 through 6, reading each section summary carefully. 

 Detailed Knowledge of IEEE 802.11i and RSNs. Readers who are seeking solid knowledge of 

IEEE 802.11i should read Sections 2 through 7, skimming any parts that contain familiar content. 

 All the Details of IEEE 802.11i and RSNs. Readers who want to learn as much as possible 

should read the entire document. 

1-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

1-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

2. Overview of Wireless Networking 

Wireless networking enables devices with wireless capabilities to use computing resources without being 

physically connected to a network. The devices simply need to be within a certain distance (known as the 

range) of the wireless network infrastructure. A wireless local area network (WLAN) is a group of 

wireless networking nodes within a limited geographic area that is capable of radio communications. 

WLANs are typically used by devices within a fairly limited range, such as an office building or building 

campus, and are usually implemented as extensions to existing wired local area networks to provide 

enhanced user mobility. 

Since the beginning of wireless networking, many standards and technologies have been developed for 

WLANs. One of the most active standards organizations that address wireless networking is the Institute 

of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). This section of the guide provides an overview of 

wireless networking and focuses on the IEEE 802.11 family of WLAN standards. Section 2.1 discusses 

the history of IEEE 802.11 and provides examples of alternative wireless networking standards.3

 Section 

2.2 explains the basic IEEE 802.11 WLAN components and architectural models, which lays a foundation 

for subsequent sections of the guide. Readers who are already familiar with the basics of WLANs and 

IEEE 802.11 might wish to skip this section. 

2.1 History of Wireless Networking Standards 

WLAN technologies were first available in late 1990, when vendors began introducing products that 

operated within the 900 megahertz (MHz) frequency band. These solutions, which used non-standard, 

proprietary designs, provided data transfer rates of approximately 1 megabit per second (Mbps). This was 

significantly slower than the 10 Mbps speed provided by most wired local area networks (LAN) at that 

time. In 1992, vendors began selling WLAN products that used the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band. Although 

these products provided higher data transfer rates than 900 MHz band products, they also used proprietary 

designs. The need for interoperability among different brands of WLAN products led to several 

organizations developing wireless networking standards. Section 2.1.1 describes the IEEE 802.11 family 

of standards. Section 2.1.2 discusses work from the Wi-Fi Alliance that is closely related to IEEE 802.11, 

and Section 2.1.3 briefly highlights other wireless networking standards. 

2.1.1 

 

IEEE 802.11 Standards 

In 1997, IEEE ratified the 802.11 standard for WLANs. The IEEE 802.11 standard supports three 

transmission methods, including radio transmission within the 2.4 GHz band. In 1999, IEEE ratified two 

amendments to the 802.11 standard—802.11a and 802.11b—that define radio transmission methods, and 

WLAN equipment based on IEEE 802.11b quickly became the dominant wireless technology. IEEE 

802.11b equipment transmits in the 2.4 GHz band, offering data rates of up to 11 Mbps. IEEE 802.11b 

was intended to provide performance, throughput, and security features comparable to wired LANs. In 

2003, IEEE released the 802.11g amendment, which specifies a radio transmission method that uses the 

2.4 GHz band and can support data rates of up to 54 Mbps. Additionally, IEEE 802.11g-compliant 

products are backward compatible with IEEE 802.11b-compliant products. Table 2-1 compares the basic 

characteristics of IEEE 802.11, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g. 802.11 wireless networking is also known 

as Wi-Fi ®. 

3

 For more information on the IEEE 802.11 standards and other aspects of wireless network security, see NIST Special 

Publication (SP) 800-48, Wireless Network Security: 802.11, Bluetooth and Handheld Devices

(http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-48/NIST_SP_800-48.pdf). 

2-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 2-1. Summary of IEEE 802.11 WLAN Technologies 

IEEE 

Standard or 

Amendment 

Maximum 

Data Rate 

Typical 

Range 

Frequency 

Band Comments 

802.11 2 Mbps 50-100 

meters 2.4 GHz 

802.11a 54 Mbps 50-100 

meters 5 GHz Not compatible with 802.11b 

802.11b 11 Mbps 50-100 

meters 2.4 GHz Equipment based on 802.11b has been the dominant WLAN technology 

802.11g 54 Mbps 50-100 

meters 2.4 GHz Backward compatible with 802.11b 

Table 2-1 does not include all current and pending 802.11 amendments. For example, in November 2005, 

IEEE ratified IEEE 802.11e, which provides quality of service enhancements to IEEE 802.11 that 

improve the delivery of multimedia content. The IEEE 802.11n project is specifying IEEE 802.11 

enhancements that will enable data throughput of at least 100 Mbps. Final working group approval is 

expected in January 2008, with an interim Wi-Fi certification sometime in 2007; products based on the 

802.11n draft are currently available. 

The IEEE 802.11 variants4

 listed in Table 2-1 all include security features known collectively as Wired 

Equivalent Privacy (WEP) that are supposed to provide a level of security comparable to that of wired 

LANs. As described in Section 3, IEEE 802.11 configurations that rely on WEP have several welldocumented security problems. The IEEE acknowledged the scope of the problems and developed shortterm and long-term strategies for rectifying the situation. In June 2004, the IEEE finalized the 802.11i 

amendment, which is designed to overcome the shortcomings of WEP. IEEE 802.11i specifies security 

components that work in conjunction with all the IEEE 802.11 radio standards, such as IEEE 802.11a, 

802.11b, and 802.11g; any future 802.11 physical layer will also be compatible with 802.11i. Section 3 

presents additional information on the IEEE 802.11i amendment. 

2.1.2 

 

Wi-Fi Alliance Certification 

While IEEE was examining the shortcomings of IEEE 802.11 security and starting to develop the 802.11i 

amendment, a non-profit industry consortium of WLAN equipment and software vendors called the Wi-Fi 

Alliance developed an interoperability certification program for WLAN products.5

 The Wi-Fi Alliance 

felt it was necessary to create an interim solution that could be deployed using existing IEEE 802.11 

hardware while IEEE worked on finalizing the 802.11i amendment. Accordingly, the Alliance created 

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), which was published in October 2002; it is essentially a subset of the 

draft IEEE 802.11i requirements available at that time. The most significant difference between WPA 

and the IEEE 802.11i drafts is that WPA does not require support for Advanced Encryption Standard 

(AES), a strong encryption algorithm, because many existing IEEE 802.11 hardware components cannot 

support computationally intensive encryption without additional hardware components.6

4

 For information on other IEEE 802.11 amendments (e.g., 802.11e, 802.11n), visit 

http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/802/11/QuickGuide_IEEE_802_WG_and_Activities.htm. 5

 For more information on the Wi-Fi Alliance, visit their Web site at http://www.wi-fi.org/. 6

 Federal agencies are required to use encryption algorithms that are Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) 

approved. FIPS 140-2, Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules, is available at 

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips140-2/fips1402.pdf. 

2-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

In conjunction with the ratification of the IEEE 802.11i amendment, the Wi-Fi Alliance introduced 

WPA2, its term for interoperable equipment that is capable of supporting IEEE 802.11i requirements.7

 

The Wi-Fi Alliance began testing IEEE 802.11i products for WPA2 certification shortly after the IEEE 

802.11i amendment was finalized. Section 7 provides more information on WPA and WPA2. 

2.1.3 

 

Other Wireless Standards 

In addition to the IEEE 802.11 and WPA standards, other wireless standards are also in use. These 

standards are unrelated to IEEE 802.11, but are presented in this section to provide context and illustrate 

how IEEE 802.11 and other standards meet different needs. The following list describes the major 

wireless architecture categories and provides examples of selected key current and emerging wireless 

standards. 

 Wireless personal area networks (WPAN): small-scale wireless networks that require little or 

no infrastructure. A WPAN is typically used by a few devices in a single room instead of 

connecting the devices with cables. For example, WPANs can provide print services or enable a 

wireless keyboard or mouse to communicate with a computer. Examples of WPAN standards 

include the following: 

- IEEE 802.15.1 (Bluetooth). This WPAN standard is designed for wireless networking 

between small portable devices. The original Bluetooth operated at 2.4 GHz and has a 

maximum data rate of approximately 720 kilobits per second (Kbps); Bluetooth 2.0 can reach 

3 Mbps.8

- IEEE 802.15.3 (High-Rate Ultrawideband; WiMedia, Wireless USB). This is a low-cost, 

low power consumption WPAN standard that uses a wide range of GHz frequencies to avoid 

interference with other wireless transmissions. It can achieve data rates of up to 480 Mbps 

over short ranges and can support the full range of WPAN applications. One expected use of 

this technology is the ability to detect shapes through physical barriers such as walls and 

boxes, which could be useful for applications ranging from law enforcement to search and 

rescue operations. 

- IEEE 802.15.4 (Low-Rate Ultrawideband; ZigBee). This is a simple protocol for 

lightweight WPANs.9

 It is most commonly used for monitoring and control products, such as 

climate control systems and building lighting. 

 Wireless local area networks (WLAN). IEEE 802.11 is the dominant WLAN standard, but 

others have also been defined. For example, the European Telecommunications Standards 

Institute (ETSI) has published the High Performance Radio Local Area Network 

(HIPERLAN) WLAN standard that transmits data in the 5 GHz band and operates at data rates 

of approximately 23.5 Mbps.10 However, HIPERLAN appears to have been supplanted by IEEE 

802.11 in the commercial arena. 

 Wireless metropolitan area networks (WMAN): networks that can provide connectivity to 

users located in multiple facilities that are generally within a few miles of each other. Many 

WMAN implementations provide wireless broadband access to customers in metropolitan areas. 

For example, IEEE 802.16e (better known as WiMAX) is a WMAN standard that transmits in the 

7 WPA2 does not test interoperability of ad hoc operation (IBSS) or pre-authentication for IEEE 802.11i. 8

 More information on Bluetooth is available from NIST SP 800-48, Wireless Network Security: 802.11, Bluetooth and 

Handheld Devices, located at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-48/NIST_SP_800-48.pdf. 9

 The ZigBee Alliance Web site (http://www.zigbee.org/) has additional information on ZigBee. 10 For more information, visit http://portal.etsi.org/radio/HiperLAN/HiperLAN.asp. 

2-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

10 to 66 GHz band range.11 An IEEE 802.16a addendum allows for large data transmissions with 

minimal interference. WiMAX provides throughput of up to 75 Mbps, with a range of up to 30 

miles for fixed line-of-site communication. However, there is generally a tradeoff; 75 Mbps 

throughput is possible at half a mile, but at 30 miles the throughput is much lower. 

 Wireless wide area networks (WWAN): networks that connect individuals and devices over 

large geographic areas, often globally. WWANs are typically used for cellular voice and data 

communications, as well as satellite communications. 

2.2 IEEE 802.11 Network Components and Architectural Models 

IEEE 802.11 has two fundamental architectural components, as follows: 

 Station (STA). A STA is a wireless endpoint device. Typical examples of STAs are laptop 

computers, personal digital assistants (PDA), mobile phones, and other consumer electronic 

devices with IEEE 802.11 capabilities. 

 Access Point (AP). 12 An AP logically connects STAs with a distribution system (DS), which is 

typically an organization’s wired infrastructure. APs can also logically connect wireless STAs 

with each other without accessing a distribution system.

The IEEE 802.11 standard also defines the following two WLAN design structures or configurations, 

which are discussed in more detail in Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2: 

 Ad Hoc Mode. The ad hoc mode does not use APs. Ad hoc mode is sometimes referred to as 

infrastructureless because only peer-to-peer STAs are involved in the communications. 

 Infrastructure Mode. In infrastructure mode, an AP connects wireless STAs to each other or to 

a distribution system, typically a wired network. Infrastructure mode is the most commonly used 

mode for WLANs. 

2.2.1 

 

Ad Hoc Mode 

The ad hoc mode (or topology) is depicted conceptually in Figure 2-1. This mode of operation, also 

known as peer-to-peer mode, is possible when two or more STAs are able to communicate directly to one 

another. Figure 2-1 shows three devices communicating with each other in a peer-to-peer fashion without 

any infrastructure. A set of STAs configured in this ad hoc manner is known as an independent basic 

service set (IBSS). 

Today, a STA is most often thought of as a simple laptop with an inexpensive network interface card 

(NIC) that provides wireless connectivity; however, many other types of devices could also be STAs. In 

Figure 2-1, the STAs in the IBSS are a mobile phone, a laptop, and a PDA. IEEE 802.11 and its variants 

continue to increase in popularity; scanners, printers, digital cameras and other portable devices can also 

be STAs. The circular shape in Figure 2-1 depicts the IBSS. It is helpful to consider this as the radio 

frequency coverage area within which the stations can remain in communication. A fundamental 

property of IBSS is that it defines no routing or forwarding, so, based on the bare IEEE 802.11i spec, all 

the devices must be within radio range of one another. 

11 Visit the WiMAX Forum located at http://www.wimaxforum.org/home/ for more information on WiMAX. 12 Technically, APs are also STAs. Some literature distinguishes between AP STAs and non-AP STAs. In this document, the 

term STA refers to non-AP STAs only. 

2-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Laptop

Mobile Phone

PDA

Figure 2-1. IEEE 802.11 Ad Hoc Mode 

One of the key advantages of ad hoc WLANs is that theoretically they can be formed any time and 

anywhere, allowing multiple users to create wireless connections cheaply, quickly, and easily with 

minimal hardware and user maintenance. In practice, many different types of ad hoc networks are 

possible, and the IEEE 802.11 specification allows all of them. Since it does not give the details of how 

to form a network, but rather only how to establish the links in a network, ad hoc mode as specified by 

802.11 is incomplete for any particular use. This means that different products built on it typically are not 

interoperable, because there has not yet been standardization on any of these possible networks. 

An ad hoc network can be created for many reasons, such as allowing the sharing of files or the rapid 

exchange of e-mail. However, an ad hoc WLAN cannot communicate with external networks. A further 

complication is that an ad hoc network can interfere with the operation of an AP-based infrastructure 

mode network (see next section) that exists within the same wireless space. 

Distribution System

BSS1 BSS2

STA1

STA2

STA3

STA4

AP2 AP1

Distribution System

BSS1 BSS2

STA1

STA2

STA3

STA4

AP2 AP1

Figure 2-2. IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure Mode 

2-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

2.2.2 Infrastructure Mode 

In infrastructure mode, an IEEE 802.11 WLAN comprises one or more Basic Service Sets (BSS), the 

basic building blocks of a WLAN. A BSS includes an AP and one or more STAs. The AP in a BSS 

connects the STAs to the DS. The DS is the means by which STAs can communicate with the 

organization’s wired LANs and external networks such as the Internet. The IEEE 802.11 infrastructure 

mode is depicted in Figure 2-2. 

The DS and use of multiple BSSs and their associated APs allow for the creation of wireless networks of 

arbitrary size and complexity. In the IEEE 802.11 specification, this type of multi-BSS network is 

referred to as an extended service set (ESS). Figure 2-3 conceptually depicts a network with both wired 

and wireless capabilities. It shows three APs with their corresponding BSSs, which comprise an ESS; the 

ESS is attached to the wired infrastructure. In turn, the wired infrastructure is connected through a 

perimeter firewall to the Internet. This architecture could permit various STAs, such as laptops and 

PDAs, to provide Internet connectivity for their users. 

Figure 2-3. Extended Service Set in an Enterprise 

2.3 Summary 

WLANs are usually implemented as extensions to existing wired LANs, and are used by devices within a 

fairly limited range, such as an office building. The need for interoperability among different brands of 

WLAN products led to the development of various WLAN standards. IEEE 802.11 is the dominant 

WLAN standard. At the time that the IEEE 802.11i amendment was finalized, WLAN equipment based 

on IEEE 802.11b was the most popular; it was intended to provide performance, throughput, and security 

features comparable to wired LANs. Unfortunately, IEEE 802.11 technologies that rely on WEP have 

several well-documented security problems, which are described in Section 3. To address these, IEEE 

amended 802.11 with 802.11i, which was approved in June 2004. The subsequent sections of this guide 

cover IEEE 802.11i features and security considerations in depth. 

2-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This section also explains the basic IEEE 802.11 network components and architectural models, as a 

foundation for understanding other sections of this guide. The major concepts introduced in this section 

are as follows: 

 Station (STA). A STA is a wireless endpoint device,13 such as a laptop, PDA, or mobile phone. 

 Access Point (AP). An AP logically connects STAs with a distribution system, which is 

typically an organization’s wired network infrastructure. APs can also logically connect wireless 

STAs with each other without accessing a distribution system. 

 Ad Hoc Mode. This is a wireless network configuration that does not use APs; STAs 

communicate directly with each other. 

 Infrastructure Mode. This wireless network configuration requires APs and is the most 

commonly used mode for WLANs. All STAs connect with an AP, and the AP transfers frames 

among the STAs and the distribution system. 

 Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). An IBSS is a set of STAs configured in ad hoc mode. 

 Basic Service Set (BSS). A BSS is composed of an AP and one or more STAs configured in 

infrastructure mode. Each of the STAs associate directly with the AP. A BSS is the basic 

building block of a WLAN. 

 Distribution System (DS). A DS is an infrastructure, typically a wired LAN, that connects 

individual BSSs to each other. 

 Extended Service Set (ESS). An ESS is a WLAN comprising more than one BSS connected by 

a DS. 

 

13 Technically, a STA is a wireless network interface implementation. It is distinct from the device that will provide an 

application using the network interface (such as a laptop or PDA). 

2-7
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

2-8
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

3. Overview of IEEE 802.11 Security 

This section provides an overview of IEEE 802.11 security. It begins by explaining the main security 

concerns and threats against WLANs. Next, it reviews the security features and weaknesses of IEEE 

802.11 before the introduction of the IEEE 802.11i amendment to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN standard, and 

the IEEE 802.11i framework for Robust Security Networks (RSN). The review of pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 

security demonstrates the shortcomings of the standard and the motivation behind the development of the 

IEEE 802.11i amendment and the RSN framework, which is intended to provide strong authentication for 

WLAN devices and strong protection for WLAN communications. The section then introduces the major 

security-related components that are defined in the IEEE 802.11i amendment. 

This publication covers IEEE 802.11i-based wireless LANs only. It does not replace NIST Special 

Publication (SP) 800-48, Wireless Network Security: 802.11, Bluetooth and Handheld Devices, which 

addresses IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g-based wireless LANs, Bluetooth implementations, and wireless 

handheld devices (e.g., text messaging devices, PDAs, smart phones). Organizations with existing IEEE 

802.11b or 802.11g implementations should continue to use the recommendations in SP 800-48 to secure 

them;14 they should also review this publication to understand the new IEEE 802.11i technology and how 

it addresses the shortcomings of the WEP protocol used to secure IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g networks. 

Organizations that are considering the deployment of new wireless LANs should be evaluating IEEE 

802.11i-based products and following the recommendations for IEEE 802.11i implementations in this 

publication. 

This section is intended to provide a high-level overview of IEEE 802.11 security concepts; subsequent 

sections of the guide discuss individual concepts in much greater depth. Readers who are already familiar 

with IEEE 802.11 security and the basic additions of IEEE 802.11i might wish to skip this section. 

3.1 WLAN Security Concerns 

Like other wireless technologies, WLANs typically need to support several security objectives. This is 

intended to be accomplished through a combination of security features built into the wireless networking 

standard. The most common security objectives for WLANs are as follows: 

 Confidentiality—ensure that communication cannot be read by unauthorized parties

 Integrity—detect any intentional or unintentional changes to data that occur in transit

 Availability—ensure that devices and individuals can access a network and its resources 

whenever needed

 Access Control—restrict the rights of devices or individuals to access a network or resources 

within a network. 

The security objectives for wireless and wired LANs are the same, as are the major high-level categories 

of threats that they face. Table 3-1 provides a list of the main categories of threats against LANs. 

Most WLAN threats typically involve an attacker with access to the radio link between a STA and an AP 

or between two STAs. Several of the threats listed in Table 3-1 rely on an attacker’s ability to intercept 

and inject network communications. This highlights the most significant difference between protecting 

wireless and wired LANs: the relative ease of intercepting network communications and inserting new 

ones from what can only be presumed as the authentic source. In a wired LAN, an attacker would have to 

 

14 NIST SP 800-48 is available at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-48/NIST_SP_800-48.pdf. 

3-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

gain physical access to the LAN or remotely compromise systems on the LAN; in a wireless LAN, an 

attacker simply needs to be within range of the WLAN infrastructure. In addition, an attacker can have 

the advantage of using highly sensitive directional antennas, which can greatly extend the effective range 

of the wireless LAN beyond the standardized range. 

Table 3-1. Major Threats against LAN Security 

Threat Category Description 

Denial of Service Attacker prevents or prohibits the normal use or management of networks or network 

devices. 

Eavesdropping Attacker passively monitors network communications for data, including authentication 

credentials. 

Man-in-the-Middle Attacker actively intercepts the path of communications between two legitimate parties, 

thereby obtaining authentication credentials and data. Attacker can then masquerade as 

a legitimate party. In the context of a WLAN, a man-in-the-middle attack can be achieved 

through a bogus or rogue AP, which looks like an authorized AP to legitimate parties. 

Masquerading Attacker impersonates an authorized user and gains certain unauthorized privileges. 

Message Modification Attacker alters a legitimate message by deleting, adding to, changing, or reordering it. 

Message Replay Attacker passively monitors transmissions and retransmits messages, acting as if the 

attacker were a legitimate user. 

Traffic Analysis Attacker passively monitors transmissions to identify communication patterns and 

participants. 

3.2 History of Pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 Security 

Prior to the IEEE 802.11i amendment and its RSN framework, IEEE 802.11 had a number of serious 

security weaknesses.15 Many vendors have added proprietary features to their IEEE 802.11 

implementations to compensate for security flaws in the standard, but proprietary features often prevent 

interoperability. This section explains pre-RSN security features and shortcomings as a basis for 

understanding the motivation behind RSN. Sections 3.2.1 through 3.2.5 discuss pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 

access control and authentication, encryption, data integrity, replay protection, and availability, 

respectively. 

3.2.1 

 

Access Control and Authentication 

The original IEEE 802.11 specification defines two means to validate the identities of wireless devices 

attempting to gain access to a WLAN, open system authentication and shared key authentication; neither 

of these alternatives is secure.16 IEEE 802.11 implementations are required to support open system 

authentication; shared key authentication support is optional. Open system authentication is effectively a 

null authentication mechanism that does not provide true identity verification. In practice, a STA is 

authenticated to an AP simply by providing the following information: 

15 Also, many pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 products have security features disabled by default, so they provide little or no protection 

for wireless communication until they are reconfigured. 16 The shared key authentication scheme based on a unilateral challenge-response mechanism is typically referred to as WEP 

because it uses the WEP encryption for response computation. However, shared key authentication is actually a simple 

authentication scheme independent of WEP. Also, it does not work. WEP encrypts the response by XORing the challenge 

with a pseudo-random key stream generated using a WEP key. The attacker can XOR the challenge and the response to 

expose the key stream, which can subsequently be used to authenticate. 

3-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Service Set Identifier (SSID) for the AP. The SSID is a name assigned to a WLAN; it allows 

STAs to distinguish one WLAN from another. SSIDs are broadcast in plaintext in wireless 

communications, so an eavesdropper can easily learn the SSID for a WLAN. However, the SSID 

is not an access control feature, and was never intended to be used for that purpose. 

 Media Access Control (MAC) address for the STA. A MAC address is a (hopefully) unique 

48-bit value that is permanently assigned to a particular wireless network interface. Many 

implementations of IEEE 802.11 allow administrators to specify a list of authorized MAC 

addresses; the AP will permit devices with those MAC addresses only to use the WLAN. This is 

known as MAC address filtering. However, since the MAC address is not encrypted, it is simple 

to intercept traffic and identify MAC addresses that are allowed past the MAC filter. 

Unfortunately, almost all WLAN adapters allow applications to set the MAC address, so it is 

relatively trivial to spoof a MAC address, meaning attackers can gain unauthorized access easily. 

Additionally, the AP is not authenticated to the STA by open system authentication. Therefore, the STA 

has to trust that it is communicating to the real AP and not an impostor AP that is using the same SSID. 

Therefore, open system authentication does not provide reasonable assurance of any identities, and can be 

misused easily to gain unauthorized access to a WLAN or trick users into connecting to a malicious 

WLAN. 

Shared key authentication was supposed to be more robust than open system authentication; in fact, it is 

equally insecure. As the name implies, shared key authentication is based on a secret cryptographic key 

known as a Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key; this key is shared by legitimate STAs and APs. (WEP 

is described in more detail in Section 3.2.2.) Shared key authentication uses a simple challenge-response 

scheme based on whether the STA seeking WLAN access knows the WEP key. As shown in Figure 3-1, 

the STA initiates an Authentication Request with the AP, and the AP generates a random 128-bit 

challenge value and sends it to the STA. Using the WEP key, the STA encrypts the challenge and returns 

the result to the AP. The AP decrypts the result using the same WEP key and allows the STA access only 

if the decrypted value is the same as the challenge. The cryptographic computations are performed using 

the RC4 stream cipher algorithm, which generates a pseudo-random data sequence known as a key 

stream. To encrypt or decrypt data, the key stream is combined with the data. 

AP

Authentication request Authentication request

Wireless station Wireless station

Challenge Challenge

Response Response

Confirm success Confirm success

Generate random number to challenge station Generate random number to challenge station

Decrypt response to recover challenge Decrypt response to recover challenge

Verify that challenges equate Verify that challenges equate

Encrypt challenge using RC4 algorithm Encrypt challenge using RC4 algorithm

AP

Authentication request Authentication request

Wireless station Wireless station

Challenge Challenge

Response Response

Confirm success Confirm success

Generate random number to challenge station Generate random number to challenge station

Decrypt response to recover challenge Decrypt response to recover challenge

Verify that challenges equate Verify that challenges equate

Encrypt challenge using RC4 algorithm Encrypt challenge using RC4 algorithm

Figure 3-1. Shared Key Authentication Message Flow 

3-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Shared key authentication is still weak because the AP is not authenticated to the STA, so there is no 

assurance that the STA is communicating with a legitimate AP. Also, simple unilateral challengeresponse schemes have long been known to be weak unless they are carefully designed, with sufficient 

entropy in the challenge, keys of the appropriate length, a strong hash function, and secure protocol 

design. Although the challenge-response messages used for shared key authentication can prevent 

successful replay of authentication traffic, the challenge-response process can be compromised by 

methods such as man-in-the-middle attacks and off-line brute force or dictionary attacks.17

Additional vulnerabilities in IEEE 802.11’s shared key authentication are known and documented. For 

example, an attacker can eavesdrop, capturing and viewing the cleartext challenge value and the 

encrypted response. The attacker can then analyze the two pieces of information to determine the WEP 

key stream. Some organizations prefer using open system authentication because shared key 

authentication provides so much information to eavesdroppers about the WEP key that it jeopardizes the 

confidentiality and integrity that should be provided to the communications by the WEP key. Another 

significant limitation of shared key authentication is that it authenticates the identity of devices but not 

users. If an attacker gains access to a STA containing a WEP key, the attacker can use that key on any 

other WEP-capable device to be authenticated and gain access to the WLAN. 

Another major problem with shared key authentication is that pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 requires all devices 

on a WLAN to use the same WEP key or the same small set of keys. This reduces accountability and 

complicates troubleshooting and incident response efforts. If the WEP key is compromised, it needs to be 

replaced as quickly as possible to prevent further malicious acts, because WEP keys are used not only for 

access control, but also to protect confidentiality and integrity (as described in Sections 3.2.2 and 3.2.3). 

Unfortunately, IEEE 802.11 does not specify any support for key management. When a WEP key needs 

to be changed, the WLAN administrators have to implement their own methods for generating and 

distributing a new key. The key needs to be replaced on all STAs and APs, which is a manual process for 

many WLAN products. WLAN administrators also need to implement methods for archiving, auditing, 

and destroying keys. Key management problems often limit the scalability of IEEE 802.11 WLANs. 

In some cases, shared key authentication is weakened by implementations that use poor WEP keys. For 

example, some implementations use the WLAN product’s default WEP key or set a trivial key, such as all 

zeroes or all ones. The key should be randomly generated18 so that it is not easily guessable. This will 

delay attackers that capture network traffic and perform dictionary attacks against it, hoping to find the 

key that decrypts the traffic successfully. WEP keys should be changed frequently to reduce the 

likelihood and impact of any key compromises. 

3.2.2 

 

Encryption 

The WEP protocol, part of the IEEE 802.11 standard, uses the RC4 stream cipher algorithm to encrypt 

wireless communications, which protects their contents from disclosure to eavesdroppers. The standard 

for WEP specifies support for a 40-bit WEP key only; however, many vendors offer non-standard 

extensions to WEP that support key lengths of up to 128 or even 256 bits. WEP also uses a 24-bit value 

known as an initialization vector (IV) as a seed value for initializing the cryptographic key stream. For 

17 Moreover, the IEEE 802.11 challenge-response scheme does not work properly. WEP encrypts the response by XORing the 

challenge with a pseudo-random key stream generated using a WEP key. The attacker can XOR the challenge and the 

response to expose the key stream, which can subsequently be used to authenticate. 18 For more information about the significance and requirements of random number generation, see RFC 4086, Randomness 

Requirements for Security, found at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4086.txt. A more technical approach can be found in NIST 

SP 800-90, Recommendation for Random Number Generation Using Deterministic Random Bit Generators, available at 

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-90/SP800-90_DRBG-June2006-final.pdf. 

3-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

example, a 104-bit WEP key with a 24-bit IV becomes a 128-bit RC4 key. Ideally, larger key sizes 

translate to stronger protection, but the cryptographic technique used by WEP has known flaws that are 

not mitigated by longer keys. 

Most attacks against WEP encryption have been based on IV-related vulnerabilities. For example, the IV 

portion of the RC4 key is sent in cleartext, which allows an eavesdropper that monitors and analyzes a 

relatively small amount of network traffic to recover the key by taking advantage of the IV value 

knowledge, the relatively small 24-bit IV key space, and a weakness in the way WEP implements the 

RC4 algorithm. Also, WEP does not specify precisely how the IVs should be set or changed; some 

products use a static, well-known IV value or reset to zero. If two messages have the same IV, and the 

plaintext of either message is known, it is relatively trivial for an attacker to determine the plaintext of the 

second message. In particular, because many messages contain common protocol headers or other easily 

guessable contents, it is often possible to identify the original plaintext contents with minimal effort. 

Even traffic from products that use sequentially increasing IV values is still susceptible to attack. There 

are less than 17 million possible IV values; on a busy WLAN, the entire IV space may be exhausted in a 

few hours. When the IV is chosen randomly, which represents the best possible generic IV selection 

algorithm, by the birthday paradox two IVs already have a 50% chance of colliding after about 212 frames. 

Another possible threat against confidentiality is network traffic analysis. Eavesdroppers might be able to 

gain information by monitoring which parties communicate at what times. Also, analyzing traffic 

patterns can aid in determining the content of communications; for example, short bursts of activity might 

be caused by terminal emulation or instant messaging, while steady streams of activity might be generated 

by video conferencing. More sophisticated analysis might be able to determine the operating systems in 

use based on the length of certain frames. Other than encrypting communications, IEEE 802.11, like 

most other network protocols, does not offer any features that might thwart network traffic analysis, such 

as adding random lengths of padding to messages or sending additional messages with randomly 

generated data. 

3.2.3 Data Integrity 

WEP performs data integrity checking for messages transmitted between STAs and APs. WEP is 

designed to reject any messages that have been changed in transit, such as by a man-in-the-middle attack. 

WEP data integrity is based on a simple encrypted checksum—a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC32) computed on each payload prior to transmission. The payload and checksum are encrypted using the 

RC4 key stream and transmitted. The receiver decrypts them, recomputes the checksum on the received 

payload, and compares it with the transmitted checksum. If the checksums are not the same, the 

transmitted data frame has been altered in transit, and the frame is discarded. 

Unfortunately, CRC-32 is subject to bit flipping attacks, which means that an attacker knows which CRC32 bits will change when message bits are altered. WEP attempts to counter this problem by encrypting 

the CRC-32 to produce an integrity check value (ICV). The creators of WEP believed that an enciphered 

CRC-32 would be less subject to tampering. However, they did not realize that a property of stream 

ciphers such as WEP’s RC4 is that bit flipping survives the encryption process—the same bits flip 

whether or not encryption is used. Therefore, the WEP ICV offers no additional protection against bit 

flipping. 

Integrity should be provided by a cryptographic checksum rather than a CRC. Also known as keyed 

hashes or message authentication codes (MAC), cryptographic checksums prevent bit flipping attacks 

because they are designed so that any change to the original message results in significant and 

unpredictable changes to the resulting checksum. CRCs are generally more efficient computationally 

3-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

than cryptographic checksums, but are only designed to protect against random bit errors, not intentional 

forgeries, so they do not provide the same level of integrity protection. 

3.2.4 

3.2.5 

 

Replay Protection 

The cryptographic implementation provides no protection against replay attacks because it does not 

include features such as an incrementing counter, timestamp, or other temporal data that would make 

replayed traffic easily detectable. 

Availability 

Individuals who do not have physical access to the WLAN infrastructure can cause a denial of service for 

the WLAN. One threat is known as jamming, which involves a device that emits electromagnetic energy 

on the WLAN’s frequencies. The energy makes the frequencies unusable by the WLAN, causing a denial 

of service. Jamming can be performed intentionally by an attacker or unintentionally by a non-WLAN 

device transmitting on the same frequency. Another threat against availability is flooding, which involves 

an attacker sending large numbers of messages to an AP at such a high rate that the AP cannot process 

them, or other STAs cannot access the channel, causing a partial or total denial of service. These threats 

are difficult to counter in any radio-based communications; thus, the IEEE 802.11 standard does not 

provide any defense against jamming or flooding. Also, as described in Section 3.2.1, attackers can 

establish rogue APs; if STAs mistakenly attach to a rogue AP instead of a legitimate one, this could make 

the legitimate WLAN effectively unavailable to users. Although 802.11i protects data frames, it does not 

offer protection to control or management frames. An attacker can exploit the fact that management 

frames are not authenticated to deauthenticate a client or to disassociate a client from the network. 19

3.3 Brief Overview of IEEE 802.11i Security 

The IEEE 802.11i standard is the sixth amendment to the baseline IEEE 802.11 standards. It includes 

many security enhancements that leverage mature and proven security technologies. For example, IEEE 

802.11i references the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) standard, which is a means for providing 

mutual authentication between STAs and the WLAN infrastructure, as well as performing automatic 

cryptographic key distribution. Section 6 describes EAP in depth; EAP is a standard developed by the 

Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).20. IEEE 802.11i employs accepted cryptographic practices, such 

as generating cryptographic checksums through hash message authentication codes (HMAC). 

The IEEE 802.11i specification introduces the concept of a Robust Security Network (RSN). An RSN is 

defined as a wireless security network that only allows the creation of Robust Security Network 

Associations (RSNA). An RSNA is a logical connection between communicating IEEE 802.11 entities 

established through the IEEE 802.11i key management scheme, called the 4-Way Handshake, which is a 

protocol that validates that both entities share a pairwise master key (PMK), synchronizes the installation 

of temporal keys, and confirms the selection and configuration of data confidentiality and integrity 

protocols. The entities obtain the PMK in one of two ways—either the PMK is already configured on 

each device, in which case it is called a pre-shared key (PSK), or it is distributed as a side effect of a 

successful EAP authentication instance, which is a component of IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. 

The PMK serves as the basis for the IEEE 802.11i data confidentiality and integrity protocols that provide 

19 The IEEE 802.11w Task Group is working on an extension to 802.11i that will protect some management frames, including 

disassociation frames. 20 The IETF’s Working Groups produce two types of documents: Request for Comment (RFC), which are accepted standards; 

and Internet-Drafts, which are working documents that may become RFCs. The last 2 digits of the name of an InternetDraft represent its version number (e.g., 00 or 05). Since this is subject to change, this document substitutes “xx” for the 

version number of referenced Internet-Drafts. 

3-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

enhanced security over the flawed WEP. Most large enterprise deployments of RSN technology will use 

IEEE 802.1X and EAP rather than PSKs because of the difficulty of managing PSKs on numerous 

devices. WLAN connections employing ad hoc mode, which typically involve only a few STAs, are 

more likely to use PSKs. The RSN security architecture and RSNAs are discussed in detail in Section 4. 

This section provides a brief introduction to the IEEE 802.1X standard, which is specified by the IEEE 

802.11i amendment. Two components defined in IEEE 802.1X are relied upon for the establishment of 

RSNAs: authentication servers and IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. The IEEE 802.1X standard 

provides a framework for access control that leverages EAP to provide centralized, mutual authentication. 

IEEE 802.1X was originally developed for wired LANs to prevent unauthorized use in open 

environments such as university campuses, but it has been used by IEEE 802.11i for WLANs as well. 

The IEEE 802.1X framework provides the means to block user access until authentication is successful, 

thereby controlling access to WLAN resources. 

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines several terms related to authentication. The authenticator is an entity 

at one end of a point-to-point LAN segment that facilitates authentication of the entity attached to the 

other end of that link. For example, the AP in Figure 3-2 serves as an authenticator. The supplicant is the 

entity being authenticated. The STA may be viewed as a supplicant.21 The authentication server (AS) is 

an entity that provides an authentication service to an authenticator. This service determines from the 

credentials provided by the supplicant whether the supplicant is authorized to access the services provided 

by the authenticator. The AS provides these authentication services and delivers session keys to each AP 

in the wireless network; each STA either receives session keys from the AS or derives the session keys 

itself. The AS either authenticates the STA and AP itself, or provides information to the STA and AP so 

that they may authenticate each other. The AS typically lies inside the DS, as depicted in Figure 3-2. 

When employing a solution based on the IEEE 802.11i standard, the AS most often used for 

authentication is an Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) server that uses the Remote 

Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)22 or Diameter23 protocol to transport authenticationrelated traffic. This is discussed further in Section 4. The supplicant/authenticator model is intrinsically a 

unilateral rather than mutual authentication model: the supplicant authenticates to the network. IEEE 

802.11i combats this bias by requiring that the EAP method used provides mutual authentication. 

 

21 In ad hoc mode, the STA and AP of the IBSS must implement both supplicant and authenticator. 

22 RADIUS is an IP-based protocol that facilitates the centralized management of authentication, authorization, and accounting 

(AAA) data. For more information on RADIUS, see RFC 2865, RADIUS, at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2865.txt, and RFC 

2869, RADIUS Extensions, at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2869.txt. 23 Diameter is specified in RFC 3588, Diameter Base Protocol, available at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3588.txt. Like 

RADIUS, Diameter provides an AAA framework for applications such as network access. 

3-7
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 3-2. Conceptual View of Authentication Server in a Network 

Figure 3-3 provides a simple conceptual view of IEEE 802.1X that depicts all the fundamental IEEE 

802.11i components: STAs, an AP, and an AS. In this example, the STAs are the supplicants, and the AP 

is the authenticator. Until successful authentication occurs between a STA and the AS, the STA’s 

communications are blocked by the AP. Because the AP sits at the boundary between the wireless and 

wired networks, this prevents the unauthenticated STA from reaching the wired network. The technique 

used to block the communications is known as port-based access control. IEEE 802.1X can control data 

flows by distinguishing between EAP and non-EAP frames, then passing EAP frames through an 

uncontrolled port and non-EAP frames through a controlled port, which can block access. IEEE 802.11i 

extends this to block the AP’s communication until keys are in place as well. Thus, the IEEE 802.11i 

extensions prevent a rogue access point from exchanging anything but EAP traffic with the STA’s host. 

3-8
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Figure 3-3. IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Access Control 

3.4 Summary 

Wired and wireless LANs have the same security objectives: confidentiality, integrity, access control, and 

availability. They also face the same high-level threats: denial of service, eavesdropping, man-in-themiddle, masquerading, message modification, message replay, and traffic analysis. WLAN threats 

typically involve an attacker with access to the radio link between two STAs or between a STA and an 

AP. The most significant difference between protecting wireless and wired LANs is the relative ease of 

intercepting and injecting network communications. 

Pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 offers various features intended to provide security; unfortunately, these features 

contain serious known vulnerabilities that can be exploited to impair access control and authentication, 

encryption, data integrity checking, and availability. Examples include the following: 

 Access Control and Authentication. Pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 performs access control through 

either open system or shared key authentication. Open system authentication does not verify any 

claimed credentials from the STA, so it is generally suitable only for providing public access to a 

WLAN. Shared key authentication uses a challenge-response scheme, but it has weaknesses that 

can permit man-in-the-middle attacks and other compromises. Also, neither open system nor 

shared key authentication allows a STA to verify the identity of an AP, so attackers can set up 

rogue APs and trick STAs into using them, potentially impacting confidentiality, integrity, and 

availability. 

 Encryption. WEP suffers from a number of cryptographic weaknesses that enable attackers with 

readily available software tools to decipher captured data, sometimes with as little as a few 

minutes of recorded traffic. The weaknesses are a result of the way WEP employs the RC4 

3-9
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

encryption algorithm and the use of a 24-bit IV, which is too small to prevent recurring IVs on a 

busy WLAN. 

 Data Integrity. WEP attempts to perform data integrity checking for messages and reject 

messages that have been changed in transit. WEP uses a simple non-cryptographic checksum to 

detect errors in data transmission and protects this checksum with a stream cipher. Unfortunately, 

stream ciphers offer no protection against bit-flipping attacks, which means that in many cases a 

determined adversary can alter both data and the corresponding checksums without detection. 

 Availability. Individuals without physical access to the WLAN can impact its availability 

through two types of attacks: jamming and flooding. Jamming occurs when a device emits 

electromagnetic energy on the WLAN’s frequency, making it unusable. Flooding involves an 

attacker sending large numbers of messages to an AP at a high rate to prevent the AP from 

processing traffic. The IEEE 802.11 standard offers no defense against jamming or flooding. 

Also, attackers can establish rogue APs, which could make the legitimate WLAN effectively 

unavailable to users. 

The IEEE 802.11i specification introduces the concept of an RSN, which is a wireless network that allows 

the creation of RSNAs only. RSNAs are logical connections between communicating IEEE 802.11 

entities established through the IEEE 802.11i 4-Way Handshake. RSNAs allow for the protection of data 

frames and provide enhanced security relative to the flawed WEP. The IEEE 802.1X framework 

specified by the IEEE 802.11i amendment provides the means to block user access until authentication is 

successful, thereby controlling access to the WLAN resources. The technique used to block access is 

known as port-based access control; it involves the AP distinguishing between EAP and non-EAP frames, 

then passing EAP frames through an uncontrolled port and non-EAP frames through a controlled port, 

which can block access. 

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines several terms related to authentication: authenticator, supplicant, and 

authentication server. The authenticator is an entity such as an AP that facilitates an authentication 

attempt. The supplicant is an entity such as a STA that is authenticated by an authenticator. The 

authentication server (AS) is an entity that provides an authentication service to an authenticator. This 

service determines, from the credentials provided by the supplicant, whether the supplicant is authorized 

to access the services provided by the authenticator. The AS either authenticates the STA and AP itself, 

or it provides information to the STA and AP so that they may authenticate each other. 

3-10
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

4. Security Framework for Robust Security Networks 

The IEEE 802.11i amendment allows for enhanced security features beyond WEP and the simple IEEE 

802.11 shared key challenge-response authentication. The amendment introduces the concepts of Robust 

Security Networks (RSN) and Robust Security Network Associations (RSNA). This section explains 

these terms and describes e security framework for RSN. It also discusses the reasons for creating RSNs. 

It then explains what constitutes an RSN and an RSNA. The section discusses the cryptographic key 

hierarchies that relate keys and introduce the alternatives for key distribution. Finally, it describes the two 

RSN data confidentiality and integrity protocols defined in IEEE 802.11i—Temporal Key Integrity 

Protocol (TKIP) and Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code Protocol 

(CCMP)—and their security features. 

This section contains considerable detail on the internal operations of IEEE 802.11 WLANs. It includes 

detailed descriptions of encryption and decryption procedures, IEEE 802.11 network element message 

flows, and various protocols. Readers without a need for this technical detail might wish to skim or skip 

portions of this section, and then read the summary in Section 4.4 carefully. 

4.1 Features of RSNs 

With the addition of the IEEE 802.11i amendment in 2004, IEEE 802.11 offers two general classes of 

security capabilities for IEEE 802.11 WLANs. The first class, pre-RSN security, includes the legacy 

security capabilities developed in the original IEEE 802.11 specification: open system or shared key 

authentication for validating the identity of a wireless station, and WEP for the confidentiality protection 

of traffic. The second class of security capabilities includes a number of security mechanisms to create 

RSNs. An RSN includes security enhancements to address all the known flaws of WEP and provide 

robust protection for the wireless link, including data integrity and confidentiality. Figure 4-1 provides a 

high-level taxonomy of the major pre-RSN and RSN security mechanisms. 

Figure 4-1. Taxonomy for Pre-RSN and RSN Security 

4-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

At a high level, RSN includes IEEE 802.1X port-based access control, key management techniques, and 

the TKIP and CCMP data confidentiality and integrity protocols. Described in Section 4.3, these 

protocols allow for the creation of several diverse types of security networks because of the numerous 

configuration options. RSN security is at the link level only,24 providing protection for traffic between a 

wireless STA and its associated AP, or between one wireless STA and another wireless STA. It does not 

provide end-to-end application-level security, such as between a STA and an e-mail or Web server on the 

DS, because communication between these entities requires more than just one link. To provide end-toend security, organizations can implement network level security mechanisms such as Transport Layer 

Security (TLS) or IPsec. Also, RSN’s security features apply only to the wireless portion of the overall 

network, not to communications on wired networks. As shown in Figure 4-2, the security provided in an 

RSN can apply to both IEEE 802.11 modes of operation, BSS (infrastructure mode) and IBSS (ad hoc 

mode).25 For infrastructure mode, additional measures need to be taken to provide end-to-end security. 

Figure 4-2. Security in Ad Hoc and Infrastructure Modes 

The IEEE 802.11i amendment defines an RSN as a wireless network that allows the creation of RSN 

Associations (RSNA) only. An RSNA is a security relationship established by the IEEE 802.11i 4-Way 

Handshake, which is described in Section 5.5. The 4-Way Handshake validates that the parties to the 

protocol instance both possess a pairwise master key (PMK), synchronizes the installation of temporal 

keys, and confirms the selection of cipher suites. The PMK is the cornerstone for a number of security 

features absent from WEP. Complete robust security is considered to be possible only when all devices in 

the network use RSNAs. In practice, some networks have a mix of RSNAs and non-RSNA connections. 

A network that allows the creation of both pre-RSN associations (pre-RSNA) and RSNAs is referred to as 

a Transition Security Network (TSN). A TSN is intended to be an interim means to provide connectivity 

while an organization migrates to networks based exclusively on RSNAs. 

 

24 A link layer protocol describes the rules for communication between two entities over a particular communications medium, 

such as air (wireless networking) or various cable types (wired networking). It defines how these entities are uniquely 

addressed, how the medium will be shared when more than two entities use it simultaneously, and how to correct for errors 

in transmission. Link layer protocols are distinguished from network layer protocols, which focus primarily on routing data 

packets over multiple links, and perhaps over multiple media types. For example, the packets of a network layer protocol 

such as IP might travel over a number of links from source to destination. Different link layer protocols (e.g., Point-to-Point 

Protocol [PPP], IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.16) might govern the transmission of the IP packets over each of the links. 25 Although RSNs may be created for both BSS and IBSS WLANs, this guide only describes the security algorithms and 

protocols for BSSs. Significant differences between these modes are highlighted. 

4-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

RSNAs enable the following security features for IEEE 802.11 WLANs, which are explained thoroughly 

later in this section and in Section 5: 

 Enhanced user authentication mechanisms 

 Cryptographic key management 

 Data confidentiality 

 Data origin authentication and integrity 

 Replay protection. 

An RSNA relies on IEEE 802.1X to provide an authentication framework. To achieve the robust security 

of RSNAs, the designers of the IEEE 802.11i amendment used numerous mature cryptographic 

algorithms and techniques (as described in Section 3.3). Figure 4-3 provides a taxonomy of the 

cryptographic algorithms included in the IEEE 802.11 standard. These algorithms can be categorized as 

being used for confidentiality, integrity (and data origin authentication), or key generation. All of the 

algorithms specifically referenced in the IEEE 802.11 standard are symmetric algorithms, which use the 

same key for two different steps of the algorithm, such as encryption and decryption. 

Figure 4-3. Cryptographic Algorithms Used in IEEE 802.1126

4.2 Key Hierarchies and Key Distribution and Management 

Fundamental to any cryptographic system are the cryptographic keys used in the transformation 

(enciphering or deciphering) processes. Since cryptography is the security foundation of IEEE 802.11 

WLANs, the security of keys is particularly important. NIST’s 2-volume guidance document on Key 

Management, SP 800-57, includes general guidance as well as best practices recommendations. 27 Keys 

typically need to meet the following requirements: 

 Randomly generated to reduce the probability that they can be determined by an adversary or that 

they will be reused 

 

26 The IEEE 802.11i amendment specifically references these cryptographic algorithms. Other cryptographic algorithms for 

confidentiality, integrity, or key generation may be incorporated by reference in one of the numerous EAP methods that may 

be used in a particular implementation. These additional cryptographic algorithms have been excluded from this diagram. 27 It can be found at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-57/SP800-57-Part1.pdf and 

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-57/SP800-57-Part2.pdf. 

4-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Changed frequently to reduce the possibility of discovery through sophisticated cryptanalysis 

 Protected while in storage, so that previous communications cannot be deciphered 

 Protected during transmission 

 Erased completely when no longer needed. 

These requirements are related to the security service known as key management, which is defined as “the 

process of handling and controlling cryptographic keys and related material (such as initialization values) 

during their life cycle in a cryptographic system, including ordering, generating, distributing, storing, 

loading, escrowing, archiving, auditing, and destroying the material.”28 The IEEE 802.11 specification 

provides guidelines for some general key requirements, but it leaves other areas open to interpretation and 

dependent on implementation. Section 7 provides additional guidance on these requirements. 

For pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 networks that used manual WEP keys, key management was non-existent. For 

instance, there was typically only one key (or a small number of keys) for all devices in the network, and 

there was no standard mechanism for distributing the keys. Networks using dynamic WEP did have basic 

key distribution protocols that were able to derive per-user session keys, but still retained all the 

weaknesses inherent in WEP. However, with RSNAs there are several inter-related keys that underlie the 

security functions of encryption, authentication, and integrity. IEEE 802.11i defines two key hierarchies 

for RSNAs that specify the inter-relations of the keys. The two key hierarchies are the Pairwise Key 

Hierarchy, which is designed for unicast traffic29 protection, and the Group Key Hierarchy, which is 

intended for multicast/broadcast traffic30 protection. Sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 describe these key 

hierarchies and explain the source of each key and the relationships among keys. 

4.2.1 

 

Pairwise Key Hierarchy 

Figure 4-4 depicts the Pairwise Key Hierarchy. The two keys depicted at the top of the key hierarchy are 

known as root keys, which are used as the basis for generating additional keys required for various 

confidentiality and integrity protections. The root keys represent the two ways in which keys may be 

installed in IEEE 802.11 RSNA devices, as follows: 

 Pre-Shared Key (PSK). A PSK is a static key delivered to the AS and the STA through an outof-band mechanism, as shown in Figure 4-5. The PSK must be put into place before establishing 

an association. The PSK may be generated and installed in any number of ways, including 

proprietary automated public-key cryptographic approaches, and manual means such as a USB 

device or a passphrase (which can be converted to a cryptographic key using one of a number of 

algorithms). If any of the PSKs are compromised, they must be re-distributed in the same way. 

The security of the WLAN is compromised if any of the PSKs does not possess sufficient 

cryptographic strength; the passphrase from which the PSK is generated must be a long and 

complex, possibly randomly generated. The IEEE 802.11 standard does not specify how PSKs are 

to be generated or distributed, so these decisions are left to implementers.31 As a result, 

organizations should review any PSK approach carefully for possible vulnerabilities and evaluate 

its performance implications. Distributing PSKs in a large network might be infeasible. Due to 

client software limitations, a common practice is to assign a single PSK per SSID to enable 

28 This definition is from RFC 2828, Internet Security Glossary, which is available at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2828.txt. 29 Unicast data transfer is a one-to-one type of transmission, used for communications between an AP and a particular STA. 

30 A multicast data transfer is a one-to-many type of transmission; data is destined for a subset of all the STAs in a WLAN. A 

broadcast data transfer is a one-to-all type of transmission where data is sent to all STAs on a WLAN. 31 Annex H.4 does, however, recommend a passphrase to key conversion scheme that WPA2 certification enforces. This 

scheme uses PKCS 5 and HMAC-SHA1.

4-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

roaming. In such a case, all users can decrypt the traffic of other users, even if the network is 

protected from outsiders. 

Figure 4-4. Pairwise Key Hierarchy 

 Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting Key (AAAK). The AAA key, also known as 

the Master Session Key (MSK), is delivered to the AP through the Extensible Authentication 

Protocol (EAP) during the process of establishing an RSNA. Each time a user32 authenticates to 

the WLAN, the AAA key changes; the new key is then used for the duration of the user’s session, 

which lasts until the key lifetime expires or the user reauthenticates. As discussed in Section 5, 

numerous authentication techniques can be used with EAP. Delivery of the AAA key relies on 

the key generation capability of the chosen EAP authentication method. All EAP authentication 

methods supporting IEEE 802.11 RSNs must have the ability to create the AAA key for RSN 

security features to function properly. Decisions on the appropriate EAP authentication methods 

are left to the implementers of STAs or the AS. As a result, organizations should carefully 

review any EAP authentication methods and AAA key generation approaches for possible 

vulnerabilities.33

 

32 There is a gap between design and practice. The IEEE 802.1X model really addresses device authentication. Some 

databases can store device information. In many real deployments, however, the mobile device proxies authentication 

credentials of the current user to allow reuse of the extensive user authentication databases already in place. 33 EAP standardization and vulnerability information can be found on the Web sites of the IETF’s EAP Working Group 

(http://www.ietf.org/html.charters/eap-charter.html) and EAP Method Update (emu) Working Group 

(http://www.ietf.org/html.charters/emu-charter.html). 

4-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Wired Ethernet LAN

AS

STA

AP

Pre-shared Key (PSK) 

Key Distribution is performed out-ofband – A secure channel must be used to 

guarantee security in an RSNA

Wired Ethernet LAN

AS

STA

AP

Pre-shared Key (PSK) 

Key Distribution is performed out-ofband – A secure channel must be used to 

guarantee security in an RSNA

Figure 4-5. Out-of-Band Key Distribution for the PSK 

As shown in Figure 4-4, the root key—either the PSK or the AAAK—is used to formulate the Pairwise 

Master Key (PMK). The PMK is a key-generating key used for the derivation of the Pairwise Transient 

Key (PTK), along with the MAC address of the STA and AP and nonces that each creates for the key 

generation process. Using the STA and AP addresses in the generation of the PTK provides protection 

against session hijacking and impersonation; using nonces provides additional random keying material. 

The PTK is composed of the following three keys: 

 EAP Over LAN (EAPOL) Key Confirmation Key (EAPOL-KCK), which is used to support 

the integrity and data origin authenticity of STA-to-AP control frames during operational setup of 

an RSN.34 It also performs an access control function: proof-of-possession of the PMK. An 

entity that possesses the PMK is authorized to use the link. 

 EAPOL Key Encryption Key (EAPOL-KEK), which is used to protect the confidentiality of 

keys and other data during some RSNA procedures. 

 Temporal Key (TK), which is used to provide the actual protection for user traffic. 

Figure 4-4 shows the bit length of each of these keys. The PSK is 256 bits long, and the AAAK is 256 

bits long or greater. The TK has two different sizes depending on the data confidentiality and integrity 

protocol that is used (128 bits for CCMP, 256 bits for TKIP). This is due to differences in cryptographic 

approaches. Also shown beneath each key is the condition under which the key is generated. For 

instance, the PMK is created for each session following the EAP authentication process. 

Figure 4-4 also shows the Pseudo-Random Function (PRF), which is an algorithm that is used to generate 

the PTK from the PMK. It uses HMAC-SHA-135 with specific inputs: the PMK, two 256-bit nonces,36

and the addresses of the STA and AP. The PRF may be used in IEEE 802.11 for the generation of keys 

of bit lengths 128, 192, 256, 384 and 512. 

 

34 EAPOL is discussed in Section 5. 

35 HMAC is defined in RFC 2104, HMAC: Keyed-Hashing for Message Authentication (http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2104.txt). 

SHA-1 is defined by FIPS PUB 180-2 (http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips180-2/fips180-2withchangenotice.pdf). 36 A nonce is a non-repeating or random number that is used by a message exchange protocol for detecting replay attacks. 

4-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 4-6. Group Key Hierarchy 

4.2.2 

 

Group Key Hierarchy 

The second key hierarchy defined by IEEE 802.11 is the Group Key Hierarchy, which is depicted in 

Figure 4-6 and consists of a single key, the Group Temporal Key (GTK). Unlike the PMK, which is 

generated using material from both supplicant and authenticator, the GTK is generated by the 

authenticator (AP) and transmitted to its associated STAs. Exactly how this GTK is generated is 

undefined and is likely to vary considerably in various vendor implementations, with possible 

implications for security. IEEE 802.11i, however, requires that its value is computationally 

indistinguishable from random. 

The GTK is a 256-bit value for TKIP, 128 bit value for CCMP, and 40- or 104-bit value for WEP. Figure 

4-6 also shows the time or condition under which each key is changed. 

Table 4-1 presents all of the keys used in IEEE 802.11, as introduced by the IEEE 802.11i amendment. 

4.3 Overview of RSN Data Confidentiality and Integrity Protocols 

The IEEE 802.11i amendment defines two RSNA data confidentiality and integrity protocols: Temporal 

Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) and Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining MAC Protocol (CCMP). 

According to its designers, TKIP was created to allow already-deployed devices to address the numerous 

inadequacies of WEP. TKIP may be implemented through software updates; it does not require hardware 

replacement of AP and STAs. However, because TKIP uses RC4 and the Michael message integrity code 

(MIC) (described in Section 4.3.1.2), both of which have known weaknesses, TKIP is not suitable for 

high assurance environments. For these environments, CCMP is considered the better solution. 

However, CCMP requires computing resources that cannot be assumed on pre-RSN hardware. In nearly 

all cases, organizations seeking to deploy IEEE 802.11 RSNs based on CCMP will need to replace some 

of their existing IEEE 802.11 equipment.37 Support for CCMP is mandatory for any device claiming 

RSNA compliance, while TKIP support is optional. TKIP and CCMP are described further in Sections 

4.3.1 and 4.3.2, respectively. 

37 A software upgrade to support CCMP is possible on most laptops, but not on most PDAs and APs.

4-7
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 4-1. Summary of Keys Used for Data Confidentiality and Integrity Protocols 

Abbreviation 

Name Description / Purpose Size (bits) Type 

AAA Key Authentication, 

Accounting, and 

Authorization Key 

Used to derive the PMK. Used with the 

IEEE 802.1X authentication and key 

management approach. Same as MSK. 

≥ 256 Key generation 

key, root key 

PSK Pre-Shared Key Becomes the PMK in pre-shared key 

environments. 

256 Key generation 

key, root key 

PMK Pairwise Master 

Key 

Used with other inputs to derive the 

PTK. 

256 Key generation 

key 

GMK Group Master Key Used with other inputs to derive the 

GTK. 

128 Key generation 

key 

PTK Pairwise Transient 

Key 

Derived from the PMK. Comprises the 

EAPOL-KCK, EAPOL-KEK, and TK and 

(for TKIP) the MIC key. 

512 (TKIP) 

384 (CCMP) 

Composite key 

TK Temporal Key Used with TKIP or CCMP to provide 

confidentiality and integrity protection 

for unicast user traffic. 

256 (TKIP) 

128 (CCMP) 

Traffic key 

GTK Group Temporal 

Key 

Derived from the GMK. Used to provide 

confidentiality and integrity protection 

for multicast/broadcast user traffic. 

256 (TKIP) 

128 (CCMP) 

40, 104 (WEP) 

Traffic key 

MIC Key Message Integrity 

Code Key 

Used by TKIP’s Michael MIC to provide 

integrity protection of messages. 

64 Message 

integrity key 

EAPOL-KCK EAPOL-Key 

Confirmation Key 

Used to provide integrity protection for 

key material distributed during the 4-

Way Handshake. 

128 Message 

integrity key 

EAPOL-KEK EAPOL-Key 

Encryption Key 

Used to ensure the confidentiality of the 

GTK and other key material in the 4-

Way Handshake. 

128 Traffic key / 

key encryption 

key 

WEP Key Wired Equivalent 

Privacy Key 

Used with WEP. 40, 104 Traffic key 

4.3.1 

 

Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 

TKIP is a cipher suite for enhancing the WEP protocol on pre-RSN hardware without causing significant 

performance degradation. TKIP works within the processing constraints of first-generation STAs and 

APs, and therefore enables increased security without requiring hardware replacement. This section 

provides an overview of TKIP, lists TKIP security features, and briefly describes the TKIP encapsulation 

and decapsulation procedures, as well as the additional countermeasures that are available. 

TKIP provides the following fundamental security features for IEEE 802.11 WLANs: 

 Confidentiality protection using the RC4 algorithm38

 Integrity protection against several types of attacks39 using the Michael message digest algorithm 

(through generation of a message integrity code [MIC])40

38 RC4 does not meet FIPS requirements for cryptographic algorithms. Accordingly, Federal agencies and others requiring 

FIPS-validated solutions cannot use WLAN security solutions based on RC4, including both TKIP and WEP. 39 These attacks include modifying the destination address in bit flipping attacks, fragmentation attacks, and iterative key 

guessing attacks; and modifying the source address in impersonation attacks. 

4-8
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Replay prevention through a frame sequencing technique 

 Use of a new encryption key for each frame to prevent attacks such as the Fluhrer-Mantin-Shamir 

(FMS) attack, which can compromise WEP-based WLANs41

 Implementation of countermeasures whenever the STA or AP encounters a frame with a MIC 

error, which is a strong indication of an active attack. 

Sections 4.3.1.1 and 4.3.1.2 briefly describe the TKIP encapsulation and decapsulation procedures, 

including countermeasures. 

4.3.1.1 TKIP Encapsulation 

Encapsulation is the process of generating the cryptographic payload (ciphertext) from the plaintext data. 

The plaintext data comprises user traffic and the source and destination MAC addresses. TKIP 

encapsulation builds upon the WEP encapsulation technique, modifying WEP with additional features 

through software, to bolster security without requiring hardware changes. TKIP uses three distinct keys: 

two integrity keys and an encryption key. The primary characteristics of TKIP encapsulation are 

presented briefly as follows: 

 Two 64-bit message integrity keys are used with the Michael message digest algorithm to 

produce a message integrity code (MIC). One key is used to provide integrity protection for each 

half-duplex data channel between the STA and AP. The MIC is computed over the user data, 

source and destination addresses, and priority bits to provide data integrity. Due to design 

constraints, an attacker can use sophisticated methods to forge information without detection. 

Accordingly, TKIP decapsulation employs additional countermeasures, as discussed in Section 

4.3.1.2, to partially mitigate the risk of these attacks. 

 A monotonically increasing TKIP Sequence Counter (TSC) is assigned to each frame. The TSC 

provides protection against replay attacks. If frames do not arrive in order, the receiver simply 

drops them. 

 A two-phase cryptographic key-mixing process occurs to produce a new key for every frame that 

is transmitted. The process takes a session Temporal Key along with the dynamically changing 

TSC to create a dynamic WEP key. 

 The original user frame, the computed 64-bit MIC, and the transmitter address are encrypted 

using WEP (with RC4) and the per-frame WEP key. Dynamic key updates and other 

countermeasures provide additional security. 

Although the destination and source addresses and priority and payload are used as inputs by the Michael 

algorithm, only the payload is encrypted. Because the frame header contains the source and destination 

addresses and priority, the MIC generated by Michael incorporates them. This prevents an adversary 

from modifying the frame header addresses to spoof the source or redirect the frame to an unauthorized 

 

40 For more information on Michael and its MIC, see Niels Ferguson’s 2002 paper, “Michael: An Improved MIC for 802.11 

WEP”, at http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/802/11/Documents/DocumentHolder/2-020.zip. 41 Developed in 2001, the FMS attack is now codified in tools that can crack WEP with a few hours of recorded traffic. A full 

explanation of the attack is beyond the scope of this document. However, it relies on the fact that certain weak IVs can 

generate predictable key streams. The attack also leverages the fact that protocols limit the possible options for frame and 

packet headers, even if they are encrypted prior to transmission. With known ciphertext and good guesses available for both 

the key stream and portions of the plaintext, the FMS technique can discover the underlying WEP key. Because the FMS 

attack iteratively uncovers the key one byte at a time, increasing the length of the key is a futile defense against the attack. 

4-9
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

destination. The TKIP encapsulation process also involves encrypting the MIC using WEP, which helps 

to hide information about the 64-bit MIC key. 

4.3.1.2 TKIP Decapsulation and Countermeasures 

Decapsulation is the process to recover the content of protected frames—that is, to decrypt a received 

ciphertext packet. During decapsulation, various checks are performed on the frames. For example, if the 

TSC indicates a violation of proper frame sequencing (it should be monotonically increasing), the frame 

is discarded. Also, the MIC is recomputed and compared with the MIC in the packet; if they do not 

match, the frame is discarded and TKIP countermeasures are invoked, which serve as a TKIP safety net. 

Although the Michael MIC offers increased message integrity protection in comparison with the legacy 

WEP and its use of an encrypted CRC, Michael is much weaker than what is usually required. Its 

objective is to provide reasonable levels of integrity assurance on pre-RSNA-compliant devices without 

requiring hardware upgrades. Michael is subject to a 229 differential cryptanalysis attack, meaning an 

attacker could expect to create a forgery in about 228 messages on average. Since the Michael MIC has 

known vulnerabilities, any failure of the message integrity check in TKIP represents a probable active 

attack. Therefore, TKIP employs additional countermeasures to help thwart these attacks. These 

countermeasures accomplish the following security goals:42

 Logging security events. MIC failures during decapsulation at the STA or AP likely mean an 

active attack. These are to be logged, and a system or security administrator should investigate. 

 Limiting MIC failures. A receiving STA or AP that detects two failures within a 60-second 

period disables reception for 60 seconds, not allowing any new associations for STAs using 

TKIP. This suspense mechanism thwarts an adversary’s attempts at numerous attacks in a short 

period, limiting what an active attacker can learn about any Michael key. The countermeasures 

effectively limit the adversary to random guessing attacks. 

 Changing the PTK and GTK. Temporal keys are erased and must be re-initialized. 

 Blocking the IEEE 802.1X ports. If IEEE 802.1X authentication is used, the state machine is 

initialized, thereby blocking the controlled ports. 

4.3.2 

 

Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining MAC Protocol (CCMP) 

CCMP is the second data confidentiality and integrity protocol that may be negotiated as a cipher suite for 

the protection of user traffic in an RSNA. Like TKIP, CCMP was developed to address all known 

inadequacies of WEP; however, CCMP was developed without the constraint of requiring the use of 

existing hardware. CCMP is considered the long-term solution for the creation of RSNs for WLANs. It 

is mandatory for RSN compliance. 

CCMP is based on CCM, a generic authenticated encryption block cipher mode of AES.43 CCM is a 

mode of operation defined for any block cipher with a 128-bit block size. CCM combines two wellknown and proven cryptographic techniques to achieve robust security. First, CCM uses CTR for 

confidentiality and Cipher Block Chaining MAC (CBC-MAC) for both authentication and integrity 

protection. CCMP protects the integrity of both the packet data and portions of the IEEE 802.11 header. 

CCM for IEEE 802.11 employs a single 128-bit session key (TK) to protect the duplex data channel. The 

42 The existence of the countermeasures, which include temporary termination of service, enables an attacker to perform a 

denial of service attack by generating MIC errors. In this case, TKIP preserves integrity at the expense of availability. 43 CCM is defined by RFC 3610, Counter with CBC-MAC (CCM) (http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3610.txt). AES is defined by 

FIPS PUB 197 (http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips197/fips-197.pdf). 

4-10
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

CCMP key space has size 2128 and uses a 48-bit packet number (PN) to construct a nonce to prevent 

replay attacks. The construction of the nonce allows the key to be used for both integrity and 

confidentiality without compromising either.44

As the long-term IEEE 802.11 WLAN solution for confidentiality and integrity, CCMP uses CCM, which 

was specifically designed to possess the following characteristics: 

 A single cryptographic key for confidentiality and integrity to minimize complexity and 

maximize performance (minimize key scheduling time)45

 Integrity protection of the packet header and packet payload, in addition to providing 

confidentiality of the payload 

 Computation of some cryptographic parameters prior to the receipt of packets to enable fast 

comparisons when they arrive, which reduces latency 

 Small footprint (hardware or software implementation size) to minimize costs 

 Small security-related packet overhead (minimal data expansion due to cryptographic padding 

and integrity field, for instance) 

 No encumbrance by any existing or pending patents. 

Sections 4.3.2.1 and 4.3.2.2 briefly describe the CCMP encapsulation and decapsulation procedures. 

4.3.2.1 CCMP Encapsulation 

CCMP encapsulation is the process of generating the cryptographic payload (ciphertext) from the 

plaintext data. The plaintext data comprises user traffic and a MAC header. The primary steps of CCMP 

encapsulation are the following: 

 The packet number (PN) maintained for the session is incremented. 

 The PN and other portions of the address field are combined to form the nonce. 

 The identifier for the Temporal Key, or KeyID, and the PN are combined to form the CCMP 

header. 

 The frame header is used to construct the Additional Authentication Data (AAD). The AAD is a 

22-byte or 28-byte parameter comprising several fields, including several addresses and the 

quality-of-service control field, that are used as additional input into the CCM authentication 

process. 

 The AAD, nonce, and plaintext data are provided as inputs to CCM along with the Temporal Key 

to encrypt the data. 

 The packet header, the CCM header, and the ciphertext data are concatenated to form the 

ciphertext (or encapsulated) packet 

 

44 See Jakob Jonsson’s paper (http://csrc.nist.gov/CryptoToolkit/modes/proposedmodes/ccm/ccm-ad1.pdf) for the proof of 

security in the standard model. 45 The design goal was to minimize state on constrained systems

4-11
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

MAC Header

Increment PN

Data 

Construct 

CCMP Header

Construct 

Nonce

KeyID PN

Construct 

AAD

MAC Header Encrypted Data 

CCM Encryption

A2, Priority

CCM Header

AES

AAD Nonce Data

TK

Plaintext MPDU

Ciphertext MPDU

48-bit

48-bit

K=16, M=8, L=2

128-bit

KeyID

PN

MIC 

A2, Priority

TK

PN

MAC Header

Increment PN

Data 

Construct 

CCMP Header

Construct 

Nonce

KeyID PN

Construct 

AAD

MAC Header Encrypted Data 

CCM Encryption

A2, Priority

CCM Header

AES

AAD Nonce Data

TK

Plaintext MPDU

Ciphertext MPDU

48-bit

48-bit

K=16, M=8, L=2

128-bit

KeyID

PN

MIC 

A2, Priority

TK

PN

Figure 4-7. CCMP Encapsulation Block Diagram 

CCM is an “authenticate-and-encrypt” block cipher mode of AES. As such, it both encrypts and produces 

a MIC. As shown, the four inputs to the CCM processing are the following: 

 128-bit cryptographic key, TK 

 48-bit nonce (derived for a 48-bit packet number, PN) 

 Additional Authentication Data (AAD) 

 Variable length packet (frame body) with header. 

CCM uses a new Temporal Key every session—with every new STA-AP association. Unlike TKIP, the 

use of AES at the core of CCM obviates the need to have per-packet keys. As a result, the two-phase key 

mixing functions of TKIP encapsulation are not present in the CCMP encapsulation. Figure 4-7 depicts 

the CCMP encapsulation. This illustrates the various functions and their sequence in the encapsulation 

process. 

The figure depicts the plaintext frame prior to transmission at the top, and the plaintext header and 

ciphertext output at the bottom, ready to send. The payload is transformed into encrypted data along with 

the integral MIC. For IEEE 802.11 WLANs, the length of the MIC is set to 8 bytes, shown as M=8 in the 

figure. The K=16 and L=2 denote the 16-byte AES key size and 2-byte maximum packet length field, 

respectively. Also, CCMP uses the 48-bit packet number as an IV. The increment PN function ensures 

that the packet number is new for every frame that is encrypted. The 48-bit packet number, which 

4-12
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

provides replay prevention, ensures that the lifetime of an AES key (the per session temporal key, TK) is 

longer than any possible STA-AP association. 

Construct 

Nonce

PN

Construct AAD

CCM Decryption

A2, Priority

AES

AAD Nonce Data

TK

K=16, M=8, L=2

128-bit

PN

A2, Priority

TK

MAC Header CCM Header Encrypted Data 

Ciphertext MPDU

MIC 

MAC Header Data 

plaintext MPDU

Out-of-sequence 

packet

MPDU 

Okay

PN check

PN

48-bit

Construct 

Nonce

PN

Construct AAD

CCM Decryption

A2, Priority

AES

AAD Nonce Data

TK

K=16, M=8, L=2

128-bit

PN

A2, Priority

TK

MAC Header CCM Header Encrypted Data 

Ciphertext MPDU

MIC 

MAC Header Data 

plaintext MPDU

Out-of-sequence 

packet

MPDU 

Okay

PN check

PN

48-bit

Figure 4-8. CCMP Decapsulation Block Diagram 

4.3.2.2 CCMP Decapsulation and Processing 

CCMP decapsulation is used to recover and decrypt a transmitted frame. The key steps of CCMP 

decapsulation are depicted in Figure 4-8 and summarized briefly as follows: 

1. The encrypted frame is parsed to re-construct the AAD and the nonce. The AAD is formed from 

the frame header. 

2. The nonce is formed from the PN plus the A2 (transmit address) and Priority fields. 

3. CCM uses the Temporal key, AAD, nonce, MIC, and encrypted payload to recover the plaintext 

data and to verify the MIC. If the MIC integrity check fails, CCM will not return the plaintext. 

4. The received frame header and the plaintext data are concatenated to form the plaintext frame. 

5. The PN in the frame is validated against the PN maintained for the session. If the PN received is 

not greater than the session PN, the frame is simply discarded; this check prevents replay attacks. 

4-13
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

4.4 Summary 

An RSN is a wireless network that only allows the creation of RSNAs. An RSNA is a security 

relationship based on the IEEE 802.11i 4-Way Handshake that allows for the protection of data frames 

and provides enhanced security over the now-antiquated WEP. RSNAs enable the following security 

features for IEEE 802.11 WLANs: 

 Enhanced user authentication mechanisms 

 Cryptographic key management 

 Data confidentiality 

 Data origin authentication and integrity 

 Replay protection. 

RSNAs use several cryptographic keys to support key derivation, encryption, authentication, and integrity 

functions. The IEEE 802.11i specification defines two key hierarchies for RSNAs: the Pairwise Key 

Hierarchy, which is designed for unicast traffic protection, and the Group Key Hierarchy, which is 

intended for multicast/broadcast traffic protection. In the Pairwise Key Hierarchy, there are two ways in 

which keys may be installed in RSNA devices, as follows: 

 Pre-Shared Key (PSK), which is a static key delivered to the AS and the STA through an out-ofband mechanism. The IEEE 802.11 standard does not specify how PSKs are to be generated or 

distributed, so these decisions are left to implementers. The security of the WLAN is 

compromised if any of the PSKs does not possess sufficient cryptographic strength. As a result, 

organizations should review any PSK approach carefully for possible vulnerabilities and evaluate 

its performance implications. Distributing PSKs in a large network might be infeasible. 

 Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Key (AAAK), also known as the 

Master Session Key (MSK), which is delivered to the AP through the Extensible Authentication 

Protocol (EAP) during the process of establishing an RSNA. Each time a user authenticates to 

the WLAN, the AAA key changes; the new key is then used for the duration of the user’s session. 

Decisions on the appropriate EAP authentication methods are left to the implementers of STAs or 

the AS. As a result, organizations should carefully review any EAP authentication methods and 

AAA key generation approaches for possible vulnerabilities. 

The IEEE 802.11i amendment defines the following two data confidentiality and integrity protocols for 

providing confidentiality and integrity for RSNAs: 

 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP is intended as an interim solution for IEEE 

802.11 WLANs to address the numerous inadequacies of WEP expeditiously. TKIP may be 

implemented through software updates; it does not require hardware replacement of APs and 

STAs. 

 Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code Protocol 

(CCMP). CCMP is considered the long-term solution for IEEE 802.11 WLANs. CCMP 

requires hardware updates and will require that organizations replace their pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 

equipment. 

Table 4-2 compares the security features of WEP, TKIP, and CCMP. Support for CCMP is mandatory 

for any device claiming RSNA compliance. As indicated in the table, only CCMP uses a core 

cryptographic algorithm that is FIPS-compliant. For other security features, CCMP offers the same or 

4-14
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

stronger implementations than WEP and TKIP. Accordingly, NIST requires the use of CCMP for Federal 

agencies. For legacy IEEE 802.11 equipment that does not provide CCMP, auxiliary security protection 

is required; one possibility is the use of an IPsec VPN, using FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms. 

NIST SP 800-48 contains specific recommendations for securing legacy IEEE 802.11 implementations.46

Table 4-2. Summary of Data Confidentiality and Integrity Protocols 

Security 

Feature 

Manual WEP (preRSN) Dynamic WEP (preRSN) 

TKIP (RSN) CCMP (RSN) 

Core 

cryptographic 

algorithm 

RC4 RC4 RC4 AES 

Key sizes 40-bit or 104-bit 

(encryption) 

40-bit or 104-bit 

(encryption) 

128-bit (encryption), 64-

bit (integrity protection) 

128-bit (encryption 

and integrity 

protection) 

Per-packet key Created through 

concatenation of 

WEP key and the 

24-bit IV 

Derived from EAP 

authentication 

Created through TKIP 

mixing function 

Not needed; 

temporal key is 

sufficiently secure 

Integrity 

mechanism 

Enciphered CRC-32 Enciphered CRC-32 Michael MIC with 

countermeasures 

CCM 

Header 

protection 

None None Source and destination 

addresses protected by 

Michael MIC 

Source and 

destination 

addresses 

protected by CCM 

Replay 

detection 

None None Enforce IV sequencing Enforce IV 

sequencing 

Authentication Open system or 

shared key 

EAP method with 

IEEE 802.1X 

EAP method with IEEE 

802.1X or PSK 

EAP method with 

IEEE 802.1X or 

PSK 

Key 

distribution 

Manual IEEE 802.1X IEEE 802.1X or manual IEEE 802.1X or 

manual 

 

46 NIST SP 800-48 is available at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-48/NIST_SP_800-48.pdf. 

4-15
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 This page has been left blank intentionally. 

4-16
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

5. Robust Security Networks Principles of Operation 

This section describes the general principles of operation for IEEE 802.11 RSNs. Section 5.1 begins by 

describing the flow of frames in establishing an association. The rest of Section 5.1 discusses the types of 

IEEE 802.11 frames used within an RSN, including the structure of data frames. Section 5.2 provides a 

high-level overview of the five phases of RSN operation, while Sections 5.3 through 5.7 provide detailed 

descriptions of each phase. Readers who are looking for only an overview of IEEE 802.11 RSN 

operation without extensive technical details should read the beginning of Section 5.1 and all of Section 

5.2, skim the rest of Section 5, and read the summary in Section 5.8. 

5.1 General Principles of IEEE 802.11 Operation 

The IEEE 802.11 media access control (MAC) protocol supplies the functionality in WLANs that is 

required to provide reliable delivery of user data over the potentially noisy, unreliable wireless media. 

The IEEE 802.11 MAC protocol implements a frame exchange protocol in which the STA receiving a 

frame either returns an acknowledgement to the frame’s source that the frame was received correctly, or 

notifies the source of an error. The frame exchange protocol is executed by each STA in the WLAN; 

every STA receives, decodes, and responds to information in the MAC header for every frame that it 

receives, with the exception of certain broadcast, multicast, and beacon frames. 

Figure 5-1 depicts a typical two-frame flow for IEEE 802.11 WLAN communication that illustrates an 

Association Request and Response. First, the STA sends an Association Request frame to the AP, which 

is a request to connect to the WLAN with a Service Set Identifier (SSID) of “NotSecure”. The SSID is a 

text name assigned to the WLAN. The AP with the matching SSID then responds to the STA with either 

success or failure. If the response indicates success, the result is an association (not yet an RSNA) 

between the AP and STA. Association is a record-keeping procedure that allows the DS to keep track of 

STA location, so that frames from the DS are forwarded to the correct STAs. 

AP

Association request Association request

STA

Association is granted. Association is granted. 

Request to associate ( Request to associate (“connect to connect to”) 

with the WLAN with the SSID = with the WLAN with the SSID = 

NotSecure NotSecure.

Association response Association response

SSID = NotSecure NotSecure

AP

Association request Association request

STA

Association is granted. Association is granted. 

Request to associate ( Request to associate (“connect to connect to”) 

with the WLAN with the SSID = with the WLAN with the SSID = 

NotSecure NotSecure.

Association response Association response

SSID = NotSecure NotSecure

Figure 5-1. Typical Two-Frame IEEE 802.11 Communication 

5.1.1 IEEE 802.11 Frame Types 

The IEEE 802.11 frame exchange protocol involves three types of frames, as follows: 

 Data Frame. Data frames encapsulate packets from upper layer protocols, such as IP, which in 

turn might contain application data (e.g., e-mail, Web pages). Data frames allow for the delivery 

5-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

of the upper layer protocol packets to a STA or AP. RSNA security mechanisms protect these 

frames. 

 Management Frame. Management frames carry the information necessary for managing the 

MAC. They provide the ability to perform management functions such as authenticating or 

associating (the wireless equivalent to connecting or registering). These frames can easily be 

forged, since IEEE 802.11i does not protect management frames. IEEE 802.11w is working on a 

standard to protect some management frames. 

 Control Frame. Control frames are used for requesting and controlling access to the wireless 

media. An example of a control frame is the acknowledgement frame, which is used after data 

frames to ensure reliability. Its primary purpose is to alert the sender that the last frame was 

received correctly and there is no need to retransmit. This simple positive acknowledgement 

following each frame is expected, or the frame is considered lost. These frames can easily be 

forged, since IEEE 802.11i does not protect control frames. 

Table 5-1 lists the 11 subtypes of management frames, most of which are applicable only in IEEE 802.11 

infrastructure mode (i.e., when STAs connect to an AP rather than directly to other STAs). A brief 

description of each frame is provided in the table. All of these frame subtypes are part of pre-RSN IEEE 

802.11; however, some have been modified by the IEEE 802.11i amendment to allow for the 

establishment of RSNs. The frames that have been modified are identified by a check (3). 

Table 5-1. IEEE 802.11 Management Frame Subtypes 

Frame Subtype Description Modified in 

IEEE 

802.11i 

Association 

Request Used by a STA to request an association. The SSID is provided in this frame. 3

Association 

Response Used to indicate the status (success or failure) of the Association Request. 

Reassociation 

Request 

Used by a STA that has been associated with one BSS to request an 

association with another BSS with the same SSID. This frame includes the 

same information as the Association Request, with the addition of the current 

AP address. 

3

Reassociation 

Response Used to indicate the status (success or failure) of the Reassociation Request. 

Probe Request Used by a STA to locate a WLAN quickly. This frame may be used to locate 

any WLAN or one with a particular SSID. 

Probe Response Used by an AP to respond to a Probe Request. This frame contains 

essentially the same information as a beacon. 3

Beacon Transmitted periodically by an AP to allow STAs to locate and identify a BSS. 3

Authentication Used by an AP or STA to verify the identity of another STA. 

Deauthentication Used by a STA to indicate termination of an authentication relationship. 

Disassociation Used by a STA to indicate termination of an association. 

Announcement 

Traffic Indication 

Message (ATIM) 

Used by a STA in an IBSS to notify other STAs that may have been operating 

in low power modes that it has data buffered and waiting to be delivered to the 

STA addressed in the ATIM frame. 

Figure 5-2 illustrates the flow of management frames in a frame exchange between three STAs and an AP 

in a single infrastructure BSS. The AP periodically sends a Beacon frame, alerting all stations that the 

WLAN is operating in the area. After completing an IEEE 802.11 authentication exchange, the STAs are 

5-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

then able to connect to the AP by associating with it. STA 1 and STA 2 perform the Association RequestResponse frame exchange with the AP to accomplish the STA registration for later frame delivery from 

the DS. STA 3 joins the network after the beacon was transmitted. As a result, it sends a Probe Request 

frame—an active request for WLANs in the area—to determine the capabilities of the AP, and receives a 

Probe Response frame containing the requested information. Section 5.2 provides additional descriptions 

of the Beacon, Association, and Probe frames. 

Figure 5-2. Multi-STA WLAN Flow Diagram 

5.1.2 IEEE 802.11 Data Frame Structure 

Figure 5-3 depicts the IEEE 802.11 data frame structure. As shown, the data frame begins with a MAC 

header, which contains numerous fields for the transport of data in a WLAN. Most importantly, the 

header provides the MAC addresses of the source and destination, as well as the transmitter address, 

which identifies the address of the wireless network interface card that transmitted the frame onto the 

wireless medium, and the receiver address, which identifies the wireless station or group address that 

should process the frame. For example, when APs bridge wired LANs, a STA can send a message to a 

wired LAN end station connected to the AP, in which case the receiver address is the AP’s address, and 

the destination address is the end station’s address. Each STA and AP processes frames with a receiver 

address that matches its MAC address. Each AP also forwards frames to an attached LAN when a 

frame’s destination address is different than the receiver address. In addition to the MAC addresses and 

other header fields, a data frame also contains a frame body, which is the encapsulated data from the 

higher layer protocol, and a frame check sequence (FCS), which is provided for error detection purposes. 

5-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Address Address 

4

Frame Body FCS Frame 

Control Control

Duration Duration 

/ ID

2 Bytes

Address Address 

1

Address Address 

2

Address 

3

Sequence Sequence 

Control Control

2 Bytes 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 2 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes

MAC Header

2 bits 2 bits 4 bits 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit

Protocol Protocol 

Version

Type Subtype To 

DS

From 

DS

More 

Frag

Retry Power 

Mgmt

More 

Data

Protected

Frame

Order

00 10 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 - 2312 Bytes

Address Address 

4

Frame Body FCS Frame 

Control Control

Duration Duration 

/ ID

2 Bytes

Address Address 

1

Address Address 

2

Address 

3

Sequence Sequence 

Control Control

2 Bytes 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 2 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes

MAC Header

2 bits 2 bits 4 bits 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit

Protocol Protocol 

Version

Type Subtype To 

DS

From 

DS

More 

Frag

Retry Power 

Mgmt

More 

Data

Protected

Frame

Order

00 10 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 - 2312 Bytes

Figure 5-3. IEEE 802.11 Frame Format 

The following items briefly describe the frame body, FCS, and MAC header fields. 

 Frame Body. This field, also called the Data field, holds a payload from a higher layer. The 

Frame Body field is variable in length, with a maximum size of 2312 octets.47

 FCS. This field is used for error detection to detect random bit errors in the received frame. It 

contains the result of applying a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-32) on the data. Because 

of this, the FCS is often called the CRC. The FCS calculation is performed on all data in the 

MAC header and frame body. 

 Frame Control Field. As shown in Figure 5-3, this field defines a number of parameters for 

IEEE 802.11 operation. For example, it contains two bits used to identify the version of the IEEE 

802.11 MAC. Another value within the field is the Protected Frame bit; if it is set to 1, the frame 

body is cryptographically protected using the negotiated ciphersuite (e.g., CCMP, TKIP, WEP).48 

The Frame Control Field also indicates the frame type (e.g., management, control, data) and 

subtype (e.g., Association Request, Probe Response).49

 Duration/ID. This field is used by a STA to retrieve frames buffered at an AP. The field 

identifies the remaining duration in the frame exchange between a STA and AP. 

 Sequence Control. This field is used to allow a STA to identify received frames that are 

duplicates, and to assist it in reassembling fragmented frames. 

 Address Fields. The MAC header for a data frame contains four distinct address fields, although 

in some cases not all fields contain relevant addresses. The address fields identify the original 

source address (SA) and final destination address (DA) in a frame exchange, as well as the 

receiver address (RA). Depending on the function of the frame, the address fields also identify 

either the transmitter address (TA) or the BSS identifier (BSSID), which is typically the address 

of the AP. The sequence of the addresses in the MAC header depends on two things: whether the 

transmitting station is in an IBSS or an infrastructure BSS, and whether the communicating 

 

47 An octet is 8 bits. 

48 Prior to the IEEE 802.11i amendment, the Protected Frame field was called the WEP field. The name was changed to 

account for the new data confidentiality and integrity protocols defined in IEEE 802.11i. 49 For additional details on the IEEE 802.11 frame structure, consult the IEEE 802.11 standard or textbooks on the subject. 

5-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

stations are part of the DS. Table 5-2 identifies the functions of each of the address fields for the 

four possible cases, as defined by the values for the To DS and From DS subfields. 

Table 5-2. MAC Header Address Field Functions for Data Frames 

Function “To DS” 

Subfield 

“From DS” 

Subfield50

Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 

IBSS 0 0 RA = DA SA BSSID N/A 

Infrastructure BSS: 

 From the AP 0 1 RA = DA BSSID SA N/A 

Infrastructure BSS: 

 To the AP 1 0 RA = BSSID SA DA N/A 

Infrastructure BSS: 

 Wireless DS 

 (AP to AP) 

1 1 RA TA DA SA 

5.2 Phases of IEEE 802.11 RSN Operation 

This section provides an overview of the operation of an IEEE 802.11 RSN. By grouping the frame 

exchanges according to function, RSN operation may be thought of as occurring in five distinct phases, 

some of which also occur in pre-RSN IEEE 802.11 implementations. Figure 5-4 depicts the phases in an 

infrastructure mode configuration and maps them to the WLAN network components involved in each 

phase, as well as end stations outside the WLAN RSN in the distribution system (e.g., other computers in 

the wired network). The rectangles represent the sequence of frames between the network components. 

The following items briefly describe each of the phases. 

 Phase 1: Discovery. An AP uses Beacons and Probe Responses to advertise its IEEE 802.11i 

security policy. The STA uses these to identify an AP for a WLAN with which it wishes to 

communicate. The STA associates with the AP, which it uses to select the cipher suite and 

authentication mechanism when the Beacons and Probe Responses present a choice. 

 Phase 2: Authentication. During this phase, the STA and AS prove their identities to each 

other. The AP blocks non-authentication traffic between the STA and AS until the authentication 

transaction is successful. The AP does not participate in the authentication transaction other than 

forwarding traffic between the STA and AS. 

 Phase 3: Key Generation and Distribution. The AP and the STA perform several operations 

that cause cryptographic keys to be generated and placed on the AP and the STA. Frames are 

exchanged between the AP and STA only. 

 Phase 4: Protected Data Transfer. Frames are exchanged between the STA and the end station 

through the AP. As denoted by the shading and the lock and key, secure data transfer occurs 

between the STA and the AP only; security is not provided end-to-end. 

 Phase 5: Connection Termination. The AP and STA exchange frames. During this phase, the 

secure connection is torn down and the connection is restored to the original state. 

Sections 5.3 through 5.7 provide in-depth discussion of each phase. 

 

50 Figure 5-3 shows the To DS and From DS fields. 

5-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

AP AS STA

Phase 1 – Discovery 

Phase 2 – Authentication 

Phase 3 – Key Management 

Phase 4 – Protected Data Transfer 

End Station 

Phase 5 – Connection Termination 

AP AS STA

Phase 1 – Discovery 

Phase 2 – Authentication 

Phase 3 – Key Management 

Phase 4 – Protected Data Transfer 

End Station 

Phase 5 – Connection Termination 

Figure 5-4. Five Phases of Operation 

5.3 Discovery Phase 

The discovery phase is the first phase in the process to establish RSNAs. During this phase, STAs 

discover the existence of a network with which to communicate. STAs locate and identify APs through 

the APs’ periodic transmission of Beacon frames.51 A Beacon frame contains a timestamp, beacon 

interval, and capability information, which includes supported data rates and the SSID. Figure 5-5 depicts 

an ESS with three APs; each has a different SSID. Because the STA shown with the ellipse is within the 

range of all three APs, it can identify and connect (associate) with any of them. 

During the discovery phase, STAs and APs negotiate several things, including the SSID, supported data 

rates, and other technical operating parameters related to reliable communication, as well as a security 

policy. In general, 802.11i does not support extensive negotiation The AP describes the options that it 

supports, and only clients that are configured for compatible options will attempt to connect. Many APs 

and STAs can only store a single configuration at a time. Section 5.3.1 provides a detailed explanation of 

the security policy negotiation process. Section 5.3.2 shows how frames used for negotiation flow 

between STAs and APs during the discovery phase. 

 

51 Beacon frames may be configured to transmit periodically from approximately every millisecond to every 66 seconds. 

5-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 5-5. Beacons Used During the Discovery Phases in an ESS 

5.3.1 

 CCMP, which is the default choice according to the 802.11i standard. In practice, many existing 

devices default to TKIP. 

 

Establishing a Security Policy 

During the discovery phase, STAs and APs negotiate the following key security capabilities: 

 Confidentiality and integrity protocols for protecting unicast traffic 

 Authentication method for mutual authentication of the AP and AS 

 Cryptographic key management approach 

 Pre-authentication capabilities (described in more detail in Section 5.4.4). 

Confidentiality and integrity protocols for protecting multicast/broadcast traffic are dictated by the AP, 

since all STAs in a multicast group must use the same cipher suite. 

The specification of the confidentiality and integrity protocol, along with the chosen key length (if 

variable), is known as the cipher suite. The same cipher suite options are available for protecting unicast 

traffic and multicast and broadcast traffic.52 The possible cipher suites allowed by the IEEE 802.11i 

amendment are as follows: 

 WEP, with either a 40-bit or 104-bit key 

 TKIP 

52 The WEP cipher suites are only valid as a group cipher suite in a Transition Security Network to allow pre-RSNA devices to 

join a BSS. They are not valid in an RSN. 

5-7
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Vendor-specific methods (to allow for flexibility and expansion). 

As listed below, there are three options for what the IEEE 802.11 standard refers to as Authentication and 

Key AP and STAs are mutually 

il in Section 5.4.4. 

 h 

-shared key, 

his is 

e 



A security and an AP is a relationship established between these two entities 

that formation, 

 

 Management (AKM). An AKM suite defines the means by which the 

authenticated during initial operation and the means for deriving the root key shown in the Pairwise Key 

Hierarchy. RSNAs may be established for WLANs in either ad hoc mode (IBSS) or infrastructure mode 

(BSS) using any of the AKM suites. The possible AKM suites are as follows: 

 Mutual authentication and key management over IEEE 802.1X or using pairwise master key 

security association (PMKSA) caching, which is discussed in more deta

Authentication is accomplished with an EAP method. If a specific AKM suite is not supplied 

during security policy negotiation, this suite will be used as the default AKM suite. 

Pre-shared key. No explicit authentication transaction takes place. If the PSK is unique for eac

STA, the STA and AP effectively authenticate each other by holding an identical pre

without which the data confidentiality and integrity services could not function properly. In 

practice, many PSK APs use a single PSK for every STA. This means that, rather than 

authenticating the client, the AP is verifying that the client is a member of an authorized group 

(the group that shares the key). The actual identity of the client has not been established, so t

not client authentication in the normal meaning of the term. However, the STA does authenticat

the AP. 

Proprietary suites developed by vendors; this allows for flexibility and expansion. 

 association between a STA 

 enable them to protect data the exchange. Both entities store the security association in

which includes the set of security policies and cryptographic keys used to protect the data (e.g., SSID, the 

specific PMK, MAC addresses). An AP that is prepared to establish a RSNA will broadcast (advertise) 

its capabilities, including its supported encryption and authentication capabilities. The capabilities are 

included in a field called the RSN Information Element (RSNIE), which is part of Beacon and Probe 

Response frames.53 Figure 5-6 depicts the fields of the RSNIE. As shown, the RSNIE also conveys the 

group key cipher suite, pairwise cipher suite, and AKM suite. For example, an RSNIE could specify a 

group key cipher suite of CCMP, a pairwise cipher suite of CCMP, and an AKM suite of IEEE 802.1X. 

The RSN Capabilities field includes an indication of whether Pre-Authentication is possible and whether 

WEP with a default key is possible. 

53 All the management frames listed in Table 5-1 with the checkmarks contain the RSNIE. 

5-8
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Element Element 

ID

1 octet 1 octet

Length Version Version Group Key Cipher Group Key Cipher 

Suite

1 octet 1 octet 2 octets 2 octets

Pairwise Pairwise Cipher 

Suite Count Suite Count

4 octets 4 octets 2 octets 2 octets

Field 1 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 5

4-m octets

Field 6 Field 6

Pairwise Pairwise Cipher 

Suite List Suite List

2 octets 2 octets

Field 7

Authentication and Authentication and 

Key Management Key Management 

Suite Count Suite Count

4-n octets n octets

Field 8

Authentication and Authentication and 

Key Management Key Management 

Suite List

Field 9 Field 9

2 octets 2 octets

RSN Capabilities RSN Capabilities

Field 10 Field 10

2 octets 2 octets

Key ID Count Key ID Count

Field 11

16-s octets s octets

Key ID List Key ID List

m denotes the denotes the Pairwise Pairwise Key Cipher Suite Key Cipher Suite 

Count.

n denotes the Authentication and Key denotes the Authentication and Key 

Management Suite Count. Management Suite Count.

s denotes the denotes the KeyID Count.

Element Element 

ID

1 octet 1 octet

Length Version Version Group Key Cipher Group Key Cipher 

Suite

1 octet 1 octet 2 octets 2 octets

Pairwise Pairwise Cipher 

Suite Count Suite Count

4 octets 4 octets 2 octets 2 octets

Field 1 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 5

4-m octets

Field 6 Field 6

Pairwise Pairwise Cipher 

Suite List Suite List

2 octets 2 octets

Field 7

Authentication and Authentication and 

Key Management Key Management 

Suite Count Suite Count

4-n octets n octets

Field 8

Authentication and Authentication and 

Key Management Key Management 

Suite List

Field 9 Field 9

2 octets 2 octets

RSN Capabilities RSN Capabilities

Field 10 Field 10

2 octets 2 octets

Key ID Count Key ID Count

Field 11

16-s octets s octets

Key ID List Key ID List

m denotes the denotes the Pairwise Pairwise Key Cipher Suite Key Cipher Suite 

Count.

n denotes the Authentication and Key denotes the Authentication and Key 

Management Suite Count. Management Suite Count.

s denotes the denotes the KeyID Count.

Figure 5-6. Fields of the RSN Information Element 

5.3.2 

 

Discovery Phase Frame Flows 

Figure 5-7 depicts the flow of the three Request-Response pairs that comprise the discovery phase. In this 

scenario, the STA sends a Probe Request frame to locate an AP in the area. The AP responds with its 

capabilities in the RSNIE field of the Probe Response frame; this includes all of its enabled encryption 

and authentication capabilities. When the STA receives the Probe Response frame, it performs open 

system authentication—null authentication—with the AP. The purpose of this frame sequence, which 

provides no security, is simply to maintain backward compatibility with the IEEE 802.11 state machine,54

as implemented in existing IEEE 802.11 hardware. 

Following the authentication frame exchange, the STA then sends an Association Request frame to the 

AP. In this frame, the STA specifies one set of matching capabilities (one authentication and key 

management suite, one pairwise cipher suite, and one group key cipher suite) from among those 

advertised by the AP. If there is no match in capabilities between the AP and the STA, the AP refuses the 

Associate Request. The STA blocks it too, in case it has associated with a rogue AP or someone is 

inserting frames illicitly on its channel. As shown in the figure, the IEEE 802.1X controlled ports are 

blocked, and no user traffic goes beyond the AP. This process of mutually advertising and agreeing on 

the security capabilities is referred to as security policy negotiation. 

54 The term state machine refers to a structured software algorithm that performs a particular function in electronic equipment. 

In this case, the algorithm is that which performs IEEE 802.11 communications. 

5-9
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

AP

Probe request

STA

AP sends possible security parameters 

(security capabilities set per the security 

policy)

Station sends a request to join network

Probe response

Open System Authentication 

request

Open System Authentication 

response

Association request

Association response AP sends the selected security parameters

802.1X controlled port blocked

Station sends a request to 

perform null authentication

Station sends a request to 

associate with AP with 

security parameters

AP performs null authentication

Station sets selected security parameters

AP

Probe request

STA

AP sends possible security parameters 

(security capabilities set per the security 

policy)

Station sends a request to join network

Probe response

Open System Authentication 

request

Open System Authentication 

response

Association request

Association response AP sends the selected security parameters

802.1X controlled port blocked

Station sends a request to 

perform null authentication

Station sends a request to 

associate with AP with 

security parameters

AP performs null authentication

Station sets selected security parameters

Figure 5-7. Discovery Phase Frame Flows 

As an alternative to the frame flow depicted in Figure 5-7, the Probe Request-Response pair may be 

absent. If the STA had monitored one of the periodic Beacon frames from the AP, it would not have 

needed to request the parameters from the AP through a Probe Request. Therefore, a STA can discover 

an AP’s security policy through either or both of two methods: passively monitoring for AP Beacon 

frames, and actively probing for all APs within range. 

Figure 5-8 depicts an example of security policy negotiation. As shown, the AP advertises its capabilities 

to the STA in a periodic Beacon frame, as set by the WLAN security policy. In this example, the AP 

informs the STA that it is capable of performing IEEE 802.1X authentication, CCMP for unicast traffic 

protection, and CCMP for broadcast traffic protection.55 The STA also indicates that it is capable of 

performing IEEE 802.1X authentication and CCMP for both types of traffic. At this point, the AP 

accepts the IEEE 802.1X and CCMP request, then self-configures these capabilities. It confirms its 

declaration with an Association Response frame, indicating the completion of security policy negotiation 

and the end of the discovery phase. 

 

55 The IEEE 802.11i amendment states that if CCMP is used for broadcast traffic protection, then TKIP cannot be used for 

unicast traffic. 

5-10
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Wired Ethernet LAN

AS

STA

When the AP receives the Association request 

message, it is configured to operate with the 

matching 802.1X and CCMP capabilities. The 

AP confirms the configuration with the 

Association response message with status 

value “successful.”

AP

Security Capabilities: 802.1X, CCMP, CCMP

Security Capabilities: 802.1X, CCMP, CCMP

Beacon Frame

Association response Frame

status value = “successful”

Association request Frame

Wired Ethernet LAN

AS

STA

When the AP receives the Association request 

message, it is configured to operate with the 

matching 802.1X and CCMP capabilities. The 

AP confirms the configuration with the 

Association response message with status 

value “successful.”

AP

Security Capabilities: 802.1X, CCMP, CCMP

Security Capabilities: 802.1X, CCMP, CCMP

Beacon Frame

Association response Frame

status value = “successful”

Association request Frame

Figure 5-8. Conceptual Example of Security Policy Negotiation 

During the discovery phase, a STA may decline to communicate with an AP or another STA that fails to 

disclose any of the following: 

 Security policy in the Beacon or Probe Response frames 

 Authorized SSID 

 Authorized encryption and authentication cipher suites. 

The IEEE 802.11 standard does not specify the manner in which these conditions are handled. This 

remains undefined and is left as a design choice to the RSN technology manufacturer. Manufacturers 

typically design their products so that these conditions are configurable via policy. 

5.3.3 Distinguishing RSN and Pre-RSN WLANs 

The outcome of the discovery phase is very important to the security posture of a WLAN. In an RSN, 

APs do not allow associations from pre-RSN STAs—those STAs that do not support data confidentiality 

and integrity mechanisms beyond WEP and that cannot create PMK security associations. For example, 

an ESS might contain several IEEE 802.11 STAs and three APs. Suppose that all STAs within this ESS 

use pre-shared keying (as opposed to the IEEE 802.1X technique) and the CCMP security method for 

both unicast and broadcast traffic. These parameters are negotiated through the discovery phase’s 

security parameter negotiation. Because the three APs have allowed only RSNAs with the seven STAs, 

they provide an RSN. 

In contrast, suppose that the STAs in the ESS do not all operate with CCMP; two are using pre-RSN 

capabilities. These stations, forming a Transition Security Network, are using WEP and shared key 

authentication. As a result, this WLAN is not an RSN, even though five of its STAs are operating with 

CCMP. The two STAs using pre-RSN capabilities create significant security holes that can negatively 

impact the security of the other components of the WLAN. Not only are the communications between the 

STA and AP not protected strongly, but also the AP must be configured to permit the use of pre-RSN 

capabilities. This could allow an attacker within range of the AP to establish unauthorized connections to 

it, potentially gaining access to other resources. 

5-11
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

5.4 Authentication Phase 

Upon successful completion of the discovery phase, the STA and AP enter the second phase in the 

establishment of an RSNA: the authentication phase. This phase provides the means for a STA to prove 

its identity to the WLAN. This security service is critical for preventing unauthorized access to network 

resources. In an infrastructure WLAN, authentication provides protection against unauthorized users in 

the DS, since the AP is the entry point into the ESS. Improper authentication can undermine all security 

measures in an enterprise. Mutual authentication also allows the WLAN to prove its identity to the STA, 

which allows the STA to validate positively that it is communicating with a legitimate WLAN, as 

opposed to an unauthorized or “rogue” WLAN. 

Figure 5-9 depicts the concept of authentication that occurs during this phase. As shown, the 

authentication occurs between the STA and the AS, which is located in the DS. This authentication 

procedure is designed to disallow all stations from using the network except for those that are explicitly 

authorized to do so. It also provides a level of confidence to the STA’s user that the STA is 

communicating with the legitimate network. 

Figure 5-9. Concept of Authentication 

5.4.1 The IEEE 802.1X Framework: Port-Based Access Control 

As described in Section 3, the IEEE 802.11 standard uses the IEEE 802.1X standard to provide mutual 

authentication between STAs and ASs. IEEE 802.1X is a general-purpose, extensible framework for 

authenticating users. The actual authentication mechanism incorporated into the framework is 

implemented by the STA and the AS using EAP. EAP provides a framework that allows the use of 

multiple methods for achieving authentication, including static passwords, dynamic passwords (e.g., onetime passwords, token generators), and public key cryptography certificates (on the AS only or on both 

the AS and STAs). Dozens of standard and proprietary EAP methods exist; Section 6 provides more 

information on the most commonly used ones. 

IEEE 802.1X authentication has three main components: a client (also known as a supplicant), an 

authenticator, and an AS. The authenticator simply passes authentication traffic between the client and 

AS. IEEE 802.1X controls the flow of data between the DS and STAs by use of a controlled/uncontrolled 

port model. EAP authentication occurs through the IEEE 802.1X uncontrolled port on the authenticator; 

non-EAP data frames are passed or blocked via the IEEE 802.1X controlled port, depending upon the 

success or failure of IEEE 802.1X authentication (which includes EAP). This model is known as port5-12
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

based access control. Using this concept, IEEE 802.1X achieves the objective of blocking access for 

unauthorized parties in an IEEE 802.11 WLAN. 

The authentication message flows between the client and the authenticator typically use the EAP over 

LAN (EAPOL) protocol. RADIUS is the protocol most commonly used to transport EAP messages 

between the authenticator and the AS. The steps in a typical successful IEEE 802.1X authentication 

exchange when RADIUS is used to support authentication-related traffic on the DS are as follows: 

1. The supplicant (client) may start the exchange with an optional EAPOL-Start message. 

2. The EAP exchange begins with the authenticator issuing an EAP-Request/Identity frame to the 

supplicant. 

3. The supplicant replies with an EAP-Response/Identity frame, which the AP receives over the 

uncontrolled port. The packet is then encapsulated in RADIUS over EAP and passed on to the 

RADIUS server as a RADIUS-Access-Request packet. 

4. The AAA server replies with a RADIUS-Access-Challenge packet, which is passed on to the 

supplicant as an EAP-Request. This request is of the appropriate authentication type and contains 

relevant challenge information. 

5. The supplicant formulates an EAP-Response message and sends it to the authenticator. The 

response is translated by the authenticator into a Radius-Access-Request, with the response to the 

challenge as a data field. Steps 4 and 5 may be repeated multiple times, depending on the EAP 

method in use. For TLS tunneling methods, it is common for authentication to require 10-20 

round trips. 

6. The AAA server grants access with a Radius-Access-Accept packet. The authenticator issues an 

EAP-Success frame. (Some protocols require confirmation of the EAP success inside the TLS 

tunnel for authenticity validation.) The controlled port is authorized, and the user may begin to 

access the network. 

7. During the termination phase, when the supplicant is finished accessing the network, it may send 

an optional EAPOL-Logoff message to restore the controlled port to an unauthorized state. 

Figure 5-10 depicts the authentication frame flow in an IEEE 802.11 RSNA. As shown, authentication 

occurs between the STA and AS, with the AP assisting in the networking dialog. The IEEE 802.1X 

controlled port is blocked before the EAP authentication procedures take place. The EAP authentication 

process, which occurs over the IEEE 802.1X uncontrolled port, starts when the AP sends the EAPRequest frame to the STA, or the STA sends the EAPOL-Start frame. EAP frames pass between the STA 

and the AS via the uncontrolled ports. 

At the conclusion of the authentication dialog, the AP controlled port is still blocked to general user 

traffic. Although the authentication is successful, the ports remain blocked until the temporal keys are 

installed in the STA and AP, which occurs during the 4-Way Handshake. This blocking keeps 

unauthorized traffic from entering the DS and prevents any traffic from the DS from being transmitted 

wirelessly. The STA may also initiate an IEEE 802.1X authentication frame exchange. In this case, the 

exchange is the same, with the exception that the STA initiates it by issuing an EAPOL-Start message to 

the AP. 

5-13
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

AP STA

AS

802.1X EAP Probe Request

Accept / EAP-Success Key Material

Extensible Authentication Protocol Exchange 

802.1X EAP Probe Response

Access Request ( EAP Request)

802.1X EAP Success

802.1X controlled port blocked

802.1X controlled port blocked

AP STA

AS

802.1X EAP Probe Request

Accept / EAP-Success Key Material

Extensible Authentication Protocol Exchange 

802.1X EAP Probe Response

Access Request ( EAP Request)

802.1X EAP Success

802.1X controlled port blocked

802.1X controlled port blocked

Figure 5-10. Authentication Phase of Operation 

After the seven-step authentication process has been completed, the AAA key is installed in the STA and 

the AS. As discussed in Section 4.2.1, the AAA key serves as a root key to enable the generation of other 

keys used to secure communications between the STA and the AP. The AAA key for this particular STA 

is the foundation of security, and its compromise would be devastating to the overall security of the 

system. The IEEE 802.11 standard does not describe specifically how the MSK is delivered to the AS 

and STA; it relies on EAP to handle this. RFC 3580, “IEEE 802.1X Remote Authentication Dial In User 

Service (RADIUS) Usage Guidelines,” specifies the method for MSK delivery. Although the IEEE 

standard does not prescribe a method for secure MSK delivery and installation, it does indicate the 

importance of the connection between the AS and AP. 

5.4.2 Authentication with the PSK 

Typically, the authentication phase provides mutual authentication of a STA and an AS in an RSNA and 

delivers the Master Session Key to the AP and, sometimes, to the STA. However, in an RSNA that has 

negotiated the PSK AKM during the discovery phase, the authentication phase is not required, because 

the shared key has already been distributed and installed in an out-of-band manner that has implicitly 

provided authentication. Therefore, when the AKM is PSK, the authentication phase is skipped entirely, 

as shown in Figure 5-11. However, the IEEE 802.1X controlled ports are still blocked, preventing users’ 

traffic from being passed to the DS. 

5-14
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 5-11. Differences in the Five Phases when a PSK Is Used 

5.4.3 AS to AP Connections 

As shown in Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-11, following the authentication phase of operation, the AS delivers 

the AAA key to the AP. The data flows from the two network elements are depicted in Figure 5-11 by 

the dashed rectangle labeled AS-AP Key Distribution. As described in Section 4.2.1, the AAA key is the 

basis of the Pairwise Transient Key (PTK) and other keys (i.e., TK, EAPOL-KEK, and EAPOL-KCK). 

The interface between the AS and the AP—to allow the distribution of the AAA key and support mutual 

authentication—is not fully defined in the IEEE 802.11i specification. However, RADIUS and Diameter 

are the protocols most likely to be used to support authentication traffic between an AS and AP. 

Although the details of the communications interface between the AS and the AP are outside the scope of 

the IEEE 802.11i amendment, the amendment does contain several requirements for the interface to 

ensure that the security of an RSN is not compromised. Specifically, the communication link between the 

AS and AP must provide the following: 

 Robust, mutual authentication between the AS and AP 

 An end-to-end channel between the AS and the authenticator for the mutual authentication 

5-15
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 The ability to transfer the cryptographic key generated by the AS to the AP securely. As shown 

in Figure 5-12, the AS to AP communication must provide confidentiality and integrity, and the 

AS must prevent key compromise during storage. 

Figure 5-12. AP to AS Communication 

The AS is a critical component of overall RSN security. The IEEE 802.11 standard assumes the 

following with respect to the AS: 

 It does not expose or compromise the PMK (a subset of the AAA key) to other entities besides 

the AP. 

 It does not masquerade as a STA to the AP. 

 It does not masquerade as an AP to the STA. 

Figure 5-13 depicts a typical enterprise environment with numerous STAs and APs, plus a single AS to 

provide authentication services during the third phase of RSN establishment. A AAA server running 

RADIUS is commonly used as the AS, but other types of AAA servers such as those supporting Diameter 

may also perform the service. In some small or single AP implementations, the AS may be physically 

integrated into the AP. In that case, there is no external communication for EAP authentication or for 

delivery of the AAA key. 

5-16
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 5-13. Typical Enterprise with Multiple APs, STAs, and an AS 

5.4.4 Pre-Authentication and PMKSA Caching 

Pre-Authentication and PMKSA caching (also referred to as PMK caching or Proactive Key Caching) are 

mechanisms that improve performance, particularly in roaming scenarios. In Pre-Authentication, a STA 

can initiate an EAP over IEEE 802.1X authentication transaction with an AP outside of radio range using 

an association with another AP and the DS for communication. This procedure creates a PMKSA 

between the STA and remote AP. The PMKSA is cached (i.e., stored in a state table in memory) on both 

the STA and remote AP. When the STA enters within range of the previously remote AP, it can initiate a 

4-Way Handshake without a successful IEEE 802.1X and EAP authentication transaction, which occurred 

earlier over the DS. The Pre-Authentication capability enables roaming STAs to start data 

communications more quickly than if full authentication were required for every association. Although 

pre-authentication is defined in 802.11i, it is not widely implemented. 

PMKSA caching can also be enabled to improve performance even in the absence of Pre-Authentication. 

If a STA in a fixed location often loses its connection to an AP due to radio interference or other reasons, 

PMKSAs can enable quick reassociation without requiring the full authentication process. 

If PMKSA caching is enabled, the STA supplies a list of PMKSAs to the authenticator during an 

association or reassociation frame exchange. If the authenticator finds a match, then IEEE 802.1X and 

EAP authentication is not necessary, and the STA and AP can start the 4-Way Handshake using the 

cached PMKSA. If the AP does not have a corresponding PMKSA for the supplicant, then it will require 

the full IEEE 802.1X and EAP authentication process. If the 4-Way Handshake fails, both sides can 

remove the associated cached PMKSA. 

5-17
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

5.5 Key Generation and Distribution 

Following the successful completion of the authentication phase, the STA and AP perform a series of 

functions that position cryptographic keys in both entities. This phase is called the key generation and 

distribution (KGD) phase. It provides the final step in authentication and allows the STA and AP to 

derive keys that make secure data transfer possible. The KGD phase has several purposes, including the 

following: 

 Confirming the existence of the Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 

 Ensuring the security association keys are new 

 Deriving and synchronizing the installation of traffic encryption keys (temporal keys) in the AP 

and STA 

 Distributing a group key for multicast and broadcast traffic protection 

 Confirming the cipher suite selection. 

The KGD phase includes two types of handshakes: a 4-Way Handshake and a Group Handshake. The 

Group Handshake is necessary only when STAs participate in multicast or broadcast traffic. Both types 

of handshakes employ the following fundamental security features: 

 Message integrity checking, to protect against tampering and to validate the source of traffic 

 Message encryption, to protect against unauthorized disclosure of data. 

The confidentiality and integrity algorithms used for both handshakes are configurable to either of the 

following: 

 RC4 Encryption with HMAC-MD5. RC4 is the well-known stream cipher that forms the basis 

of WEP. RC4 uses the 128-bit EAPOL-KEK derived from the PTK using the PRF. 

 AES Key Wrap56 with HMAC-SHA-1-128. The AES Key Wrap was designed specifically to 

encrypt keying material (cryptographic keys). The key wrap parses data into n blocks of 64-bits 

and “wraps” (encrypts) the key contents. The key wrap uses the AES codebook mode along with 

the EAPOL-KEK derived from the PTK. 

Both RC4 and the AES Key Wrap use the HMAC along with the EAPOL-KCK derived from the PTK 

using the PRF to provide integrity during the 4-Way Handshake. As discussed in Section 2, Federal 

agencies are required to use encryption algorithms that are FIPS-approved. RC4 encryption and MD5 are 

not FIPS-approved, but AES and SHA-1 are, so NIST requires that Federal agencies use AES Key Wrap 

with HMAC-SHA-1-128 instead of RC4 encryption with HMAC-MD5. 

5.5.1 

 

4-Way Handshake 

The KGD phase begins with the 4-Way Handshake, which is depicted in Figure 5-14. During the 

handshake, four frames are exchanged between the STA and the AP. To generate data for the frames and 

verify data received in frames, both the STA and the AP perform several computations. At the successful 

conclusion of the 4-Way Handshake, the AP and STA have been mutually authenticated. At that point, 

the IEEE 802.1X controlled ports are opened to allow the flow of frames for data traffic. 

56 The AES Key Wrap is specified in RFC 3394, Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Key Wrap Algorithm, available at 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3394.txt. 

5-18
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 5-14. 4-Way Handshake 

Frames 2, 3 and 4 in the exchange are protected from modification using a message integrity code (MIC) 

applied to the frames. This message integrity feature, which is mandatory for all frames except the first 

frame, is performed by computing a message integrity check over the entire frame and sending the MIC 

along with the frame. Although Frame 1 is not integrity-protected, any modification to it can be detected 

by the subsequent checking mechanisms. Message encryption is performed to protect critical data from 

unauthorized disclosure. It may also be used in frame 2 to encrypt the RSNIE; however, this is optional. 

5.5.2 Group Key Handshake 

The Group Key Handshake is used by the AP to send a new GTK to a STA. It may occur immediately 

after the 4-Way Handshake or upon STA initiation. It is necessary to support multicast or broadcast 

traffic. Figure 5-15 depicts the simple two-frame Group Key Handshake. 

5-19
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 5-15. Group Key Handshake 

After the Group Key Handshake is complete, the AP and STA are ready for operation. The Group Key 

Handshake also may be used to distribute subsequent GTKs. The AP can use the handshake to update the 

GTK in STAs under the following conditions: 

 On disassociation or deauthentication of a STA 

 Upon occurrence of an event on the STA that triggers an update, such as a configuration change 

in the STA’s local security policy. 

The GMK used to derive the GTK may be updated in the AP at a time interval configured into the system. 

Periodic updating of the GMK may be included in the security policy for the WLAN. Organizations 

should update the GMK to prevent exposure of subsequent traffic between STAs and the AP, if the GMK 

is ever compromised. 

5.6 Protected Data Exchange 

The fourth phase in the operation of an RSN is the protected data exchange phase. Before this phase, the 

AP and STA have already done the following: 

 Become associated and negotiated a security policy (discovery phase) 

 Mutually authenticated using EAP and derived a Master Session Key using the uncontrolled 

IEEE 802.1X port, or implicitly authenticated through a previously installed preshared key 

(authentication phase) 

 Generated, distributed and confirmed the session keys through the 4-Way Handshake (KGD 

phase) 

 Derived a pairwise transient key and unblocked the IEEE 802.1X ports (KGD phase). 

These actions have prepared the AP and STA to communicate securely. During the protected data 

exchange phase, the AP and STA may now share data securely. The traffic between the AP and STA is 

5-20
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

protected using the data confidentiality and integrity algorithms chosen during the discovery phase. IEEE 

802.11i supports three methods of data transfer: unicast, multicast, and broadcast. 

For RSNs, unicast (also called “directed”) is the type of data transfer used most often during the protected 

data exchange phase. Unicast data transfer can occur when a unique association exists between the AP 

and the STA and a pairwise transient key is used for the protection of the traffic. Protections afforded 

unicast frames include encryption, integrity protection, and replay protection. Additionally, because data 

forgery is a major security concern in WLANs, unicast frames are equipped with a data origin 

authentication mechanism that prevents masquerading attacks. The mechanism allows a STA to confirm 

whether or not a received data frame originated from the claimed STA. 

The broadcast and multicast data transfer mechanisms (also called “group”) allow for common data to be 

transferred to multiple devices efficiently. Communication between the AP and the STAs is protected 

using CCMP. Unique Group Key Handshakes with each STA insert the GTK used with CCMP to protect 

the data exchanges. Because all STAs share the same GTK, a single breach of the GTK affects all STAs. 

5.7 Connection Termination 

The fifth and final phase in the operation of an RSNA is the connection termination phase. During this 

phase, the association between the STA and the AP is deleted, and the wireless connection is terminated. 

This phase provides the elegant teardown of a connection and a restoration to an initialized state. 

During the connection termination phase, the following events occur: 

 The AP deauthenticates the STA. 

 The security associations, used internally by the AP to keep track of associations between STAs 

and APs, are deleted. 

 The temporal keys used for encrypting and protecting the integrity of data traffic are deleted. 

 The IEEE 802.1X controlled port returns to a blocked state so that user traffic cannot pass. 

The connection termination phase may be entered in several ways, including the following: 

 Radio communication between the STA and AP is lost (e.g., STA moves out of range). 

 The 4-Way Handshake or Group Key Handshake times out during execution. 

 The RSNIE check during the 4-Way Handshake fails. 

 The user powers down the STA or disables the NIC. 

 The security policy indicates a termination of the connection (implementation-specific). 

This phase restores the AP and STA to an initialized state. If further communication is subsequently 

required, then these devices begin anew at the discovery phase with the re-discovery of the available 

resources and capabilities. 

5.8 Summary 

IEEE 802.11 defines how frames are exchanged between STAs and APs. There are three types of IEEE 

802.11 frames, as follows: 

5-21
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Data frames, which encapsulate packets from upper layer protocols, such as IP, which in turn 

might contain application data (e.g., e-mail, Web pages). 

 Management frames, which include informational probes and beacons, and messages related to 

the management of association and authentication events. 

 Control frames, which are used for requesting and controlling access to the wireless media, such 

as sending an acknowledgement after receiving a data frame. 

By grouping the IEEE 802.11 frame exchanges by function, IEEE 802.11 operation may be thought of as 

occurring in the following five distinct phases: 

 Phase 1: Discovery. The STA identifies an AP for a WLAN with which it wishes to 

communicate. The STA locates an AP either by receiving one of the AP’s periodic transmissions 

of Beacon frames, or by sending a Probe Request to solicit a Probe Response from an AP. After 

the STA has identified an AP, the STA and the AP exchange frames to negotiate various 

parameters for their communications. By the end of the phase, the STA and AP have established 

a security policy that specifies several key security capabilities, such as data confidentiality and 

integrity protocols for protecting traffic, an authentication method, and a key distribution 

approach. 

 Phase 2: Authentication. During this phase, the STA and AS prove their identities to each 

other. The authentication frames pass through the AP, which also blocks non-authentication 

traffic from the STA using IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. The actual authentication 

mechanism is implemented by the STA and AS using EAP, which provides a framework that 

allows the use of multiple methods for achieving authentication, including static passwords, 

dynamic passwords, and public key cryptography certificates. After authentication has been 

completed, the AAA key is installed in the STA and AS; it serves as a root key to enable the 

generation of other keys used to secure communications between the STA and AP. 

 Phase 3: Key Generation and Distribution (KGD). During the KGD phase, the AP and the 

STA perform several operations that cause cryptographic keys to be generated and placed on the 

AP and the STA. The KGD phase employs two types of handshakes: a 4-Way Handshake and a 

Group Key Handshake. Both employ message encryption and integrity checking, using one of 

two confidentiality and integrity algorithms. For both types of handshakes, NIST requires the use 

of AES Key Wrap with HMAC-SHA-1-128 instead of RC4 encryption with HMAC-MD5 

because AES and SHA-1 are FIPS-approved algorithms, and RC4 and MD5 are not. 

 Phase 4: Protected Data Transfer. The STA and AP share data securely, using the security 

policy and cryptographic keys established during the first three phases. Because secure data 

transfer occurs between the STA and the AP only, organizations need to consider carefully the 

security of the data during the rest of its transit (e.g., on the DS). 

 Phase 5: Connection Termination. During this phase, the STA and AP tear down their secure 

connection and delete their association, thereby terminating their wireless connection. 

The RSN framework introduces the authentication phase, the key generation and distribution phase, and 

the connection termination phase into IEEE 802.11 operation. Before the IEEE 802.11i amendment, 

IEEE 802.11 operation involved rudimentary authentication, but only as part of the discovery phase. The 

RSN framework also introduces new elements and techniques into the other phases, but the basic nature 

of the dialog remains the same. 

5-22
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Organizations that want to establish IEEE 802.11 RSNs should configure their APs so that they permit the 

establishment of RSNAs only. During the discovery phase, if an AP permits a WEP-based association 

with any STA, then not only is that association not an RSNA, but the WLAN is no longer an RSN. All

associations must be RSNAs for the WLAN to be considered an RSN. Allowing any WEP-based 

associations creates significant security holes that can negatively impact the security of the other 

components of the WLAN. The communications between some STAs and APs will not be protected 

strongly, and having APs configured to permit the use of pre-RSN capabilities could allow attackers 

within range of the AP to establish unauthorized connections to it, potentially gaining access to other 

resources. 

5-23
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 This page has been left blank intentionally. 

5-24
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

6. Extensible Authentication Protocol 

As discussed in Section 4, the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) is used during the authentication 

phase of an IEEE 802.11 RSN. It provides the authentication framework for IEEE 802.11 RSNs that use 

802.1X port-based access control. EAP was first officially defined in RFC 2284,57 which was released in 

March 1998. It was revised in June 2004 with the release of RFC 3748.58 The original EAP RFC focuses 

primarily on the EAP packet format and message types. The subsequent RFC includes significant new 

material on the EAP framework, security considerations, and interaction with other protocols. 

The protocol was developed to provide authentication services for Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the 

primary link-layer protocol for dial-up connections to IP networks. Before EAP, PPP employed the 

authentication services of Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge-Handshake 

Authentication Protocol (CHAP). Increasingly, there was a demand to support additional deployed 

authentication methods, such as One Time Passwords or tokens that issue passcodes. Rather than add 

new authentication methods to PPP, a protocol was created that could be adapted to new authentication 

methods as they became available. EAP is the outcome of that effort. As EAP deployment spread to 

other environments, security flaws were discovered. Attempts were made to define generic EAP security 

requirements, as well as the security needs applicable to specific environments. 

EAP supports a wide variety of authentication methods, also called EAP methods. These methods include 

authentication based on passwords, certificates, smart cards, and tokens. EAP methods can also include 

combinations of authentication techniques, such as a certificate followed by a password, or the option of 

using either a smart card or a token. This flexibility means that EAP can integrate with nearly any 

environment to which a WLAN might connect. EAP’s pass-through feature enables an AP to forward 

authentication messages to and from a back-end authentication infrastructure consisting of one or a small 

number of ASs, which greatly enhances the scalability and performance of the RSN solution. EAP is also 

used to enable both peers (supplicant and AS) to agree on the keying material and to distribute the key 

material that serves as the basis for nearly all of the RSN security protections. The keying material can be 

mutually derived or distributed by the AS. Subsequently, the AS distributes the keying material to the 

AP. The keying material is used as (loose) authorization from the AS to AP to signal the AP that the STA 

is authorized to gain access to the WLAN. The protocol most commonly used to transport back-end EAP 

authentication and key distribution traffic is RADIUS. In this configuration, EAP conversations are 

carried within RADIUS packets. 

The EAP method or methods deployed in an IEEE 802.11 RSN are critical in determining the security of 

the resulting solution. IEEE 802.11 does not specify a particular authentication method for RSNs, which 

gives organizations considerable discretion in choosing which authentication method to employ. 

However, IEEE 802.11i describes the basic EAP assumptions and requirements that are necessary to 

enable the IEEE 802.11i security model to hold up. If an organization chooses a weak authentication 

method or implements a strong method improperly, the EAP implementation could seriously weaken the 

RSN protections. Moreover, if the EAP implementation is also used to support integrated or single signon in an enterprise, security breaches could compromise other network assets as well. 

This section provides guidance to assist organizations in planning their EAP implementations. The 

section first discusses common EAP methods and explains how organizations can select EAP methods 

appropriate to their environment. The section next examines additional EAP security considerations. The 

last part of the section introduces the EAP architectural model and related support requirements. 

 

57 RFC 2284, PPP Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), is available for download from 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2284.txt. 58 RFC 3748, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), is available at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3748.txt. 

6-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

6.1 EAP Methods 

EAP methods perform the authentication transaction and generate the key material used to protect 

subsequent communications. Because of the extensible nature of EAP, dozens of EAP methods exist, and 

others are being developed. The specifications for some of the EAP methods most commonly used in 

WLAN environments are available publicly as peer-reviewed or privately submitted IETF Internet-Drafts 

or RFCs.59 This enables software developers from various organizations to write implementations of the 

EAP methods for WLAN products. Once an EAP method is expected to be in common use, the Internet 

Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) assigns it a method type code, which effectively adds it to a 

universally accepted directory of EAP methods.60 To date, IANA has allocated method type codes to 

approximately 40 EAP methods. The EAP software on each device knows which method to invoke based 

on the method type code in the incoming EAP packet. 

EAP methods support a number of different types of authentication. For example, authentication might 

involve a user-defined password entered into a dialog box, a one-time password read from a hardware 

token, or a certificate stored on a smart card or USB device. Also, while authentication between a STA 

and an AS is mutual, it is not necessarily symmetric. For example, the AS might authenticate to the STA 

using a certificate, but the STA might authenticate to the AS with a user-supplied biometric. In all these 

cases, the nature of the authentication depends on the EAP method employed. 

To protect against certain types of attacks, EAP only allows one authentication method to be used in each 

EAP conversation, but complex authentication architectures can still be supported within this framework. 

EAP multiplexing is the ability of an EAP server to handle multiple EAP methods and distinguish 

between each EAP conversation when more than one is occurring at the same time. EAP multiplexing 

enables an organization to require different authentication methods for different applications or user 

populations. EAP tunneling allows the nesting of one or more EAP methods within another EAP method, 

which in effect requires one type of authentication to be dependent on another in the context of a single 

EAP conversation. For example, through the use of EAP tunneling, a STA may use one or more 

techniques to authenticate to the AS, while the AS uses another technique to authenticate to the STA. As 

discussed later in this section, many of the leading EAP methods for WLAN are tunneled methods. 

The remainder of this section discusses how EAP methods are used in practice and describes particular 

EAP methods and their relative advantages and disadvantages. Section 6.1.1 reviews the EAP method 

requirements for WLANs. Section 6.1.2 discusses the baseline EAP methods included in RFC 3748, and 

Section 6.1.3 describes the EAP methods most commonly used in WLAN environments. Finally, Section 

6.1.4 summarizes and compares the EAP methods discussed in Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3. 

6.1.1 

 

EAP Method Requirements for WLANs 

EAP methods can support authentication in a wide range of environments, including dial-up networking 

services and cellular telephony, but not all EAP methods are appropriate for IEEE 802.11 RSNs. This 

section reviews EAP method requirements for WLANs. It is based largely on RFC 4017, Extensible 

Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method Requirements for Wireless LANs,61 which is expected to guide 

industry development of new EAP methods for WLAN applications. 

59 Of the EAP methods commonly used with IEEE 802.11, only EAP-SIM has achieved RFC status (RFC 4186, 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4186.txt). The IETF EMU Working Group (http://www.ietf.org/html.charters/emu-charter.html) 

is developing an EAP-TLS Internet Draft. 60 For the complete list of EAP methods, see the EAP Registry at http://www.iana.org/assignments/eap-numbers. 61 RFC 4017 is available at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4017.txt. 

6-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Some EAP methods have security features that other methods do not. To help people understand the level 

of security that an EAP method provides, RFC 3748 includes a list of security claims, which are 

essentially security protection goals that an EAP method might meet. Since the publication of RFC 3748 

in June 2004, EAP methods entering the IETF RFC process must include a statement of which RFC 3748 

security claims apply to the method and which do not. In addition, the specification for the EAP method 

should include a justification for the claims that it makes, perhaps through a formal proof, so that users of 

the EAP method can assess the level of assurance behind the claim. RFC 4017 identifies the security 

claims that are mandatory, recommended, and optional for WLANs. Table 6-1 summarizes the result of 

that effort. 

Table 6-1. Security Claims for EAP Methods Used in WLANs (Part 1 of 2) 

Security Claim Requirement 

Level Explanation of Claim 

Key derivation Mandatory Key derivation is the ability of the EAP method to derive the exportable key 

material that will be used for IEEE 802.11 RSN cryptographic protections.62

Key strength Mandatory Key strength is a measure of the strength of the key derivation claim, 

expressed in a number of bits.63

Mutual 

authentication Mandatory 

Mutual authentication occurs when the STA authenticates the AS and the AS 

authenticates the STA in the same EAP exchange using a particular EAP 

method. Two independent one-way methods do not necessarily constitute 

mutual authentication. 

Shared state 

equivalence64 Mandatory 

Shared state equivalence means that the EAP peer and server must share 

state attributes associated with the EAP method, including the method 

version number, the credentials provided and accepted, and any other 

negotiated method-specific state attributes. Both parties must be able to 

distinguish one instance of the method from another. 

Dictionary 

attack 

resistance 

Mandatory 

A password-based EAP method provides resistance against dictionary 

attacks if it does not allow an attacker to capture EAP traffic and then use a 

dictionary of common passwords to guess the password. 

Man-in-themiddle attack 

resistance65 Mandatory 

An EAP method provides man-in-the-middle attack resistance if an attacker 

cannot use a WLAN device to proxy communication successfully between a 

STA and AP in an unauthorized manner. In man-in-the-middle attacks, the 

adversary’s device impersonates the STA when communicating with the AP 

and impersonates the AP when communicating with the STA. 

 

62 IEEE 802.11i-compliant WLAN equipment will not be able to function with EAP methods that cannot satisfy the key 

derivation claim because the WLAN software on the WLAN equipment needs the key material to perform subsequent 

transactions. This distinguishes the key derivation claim from other security claims; methods that cannot make the other 

security claims will provide inadequate protection, but will not cause system failure. 63 Per RFC 4017, an EAP method suitable for use in an IEEE 802.11 RSN must generate key material with at least 128 bits of 

effective key strength (as defined in Section 7.2.1 of RFC 3748) and must export a Master Session Key (MSK) and an 

Extended Master Session Key (EMSK) of at least 512 bits each (as noted in RFC 3748, Section 7.10). 64 This claim is not defined in RFC 3748, Section 7.2.1, but appears as a mandatory requirement in RFC 4017. 65 Man-in-the-middle attack resistance corresponds to the cryptographic binding, integrity protection, replay protection, and 

session independence security claims defined in RFC 3748, Section 7.2.1. These claims are combined into a single 

requirement in RFC 4017. Protection against man-in-the-middle attacks can be provided through several means, including 

cryptographic binding, session independence, replay protection, or integrity protection. In cryptographic binding, a unique 

identifier from each entity is included in the key generation process in such a way as to guarantee that the parties to a 

communication did not change during the communication session. Session independence, often referred to as forward and 

reverse secrecy, is realized when an attacker cannot compromise the key material from subsequent or prior sessions from a 

compromise of any given session. Replay protection is achieved when a unique element such as a counter value is used in 

key generation. The result is that unique keys are used for each transaction, which prevents an attacker from capturing one 

session and replaying it at a later time. Integrity protection refers to the use of cryptography to provide data origin 

authentication and protection against unauthorized modification of EAP packets. 

6-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 6-1. Security Claims for EAP Methods Used in WLANs (Part 2 of 2) 

Security Claim Requirement 

Level Explanation of Claim

Protected 

ciphersuite 

negotiation 

Mandatory 

Protected ciphersuite negotiation refers to the negotiation of a cryptographic 

algorithm and key to protect the confidentiality and integrity of the EAP 

conversation. This claim does not refer to the ciphersuite used to protect 

subsequent data traffic. 

Packet 

fragmentation 

and reassembly 

Recommended 

Packet fragmentation and reassembly enables an EAP method to handle 

messages larger than EAP’s Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) limit of 

1020 octets.66

Confidentiality Recommended 

Confidentiality refers to encryption of EAP messages, including EAP 

Requests and Responses, success and failure result indications, and user 

identities. 

Channel 

binding Optional 

Channel binding can be used to ensure that the authenticator, when in passthrough mode, is validated and not impersonated. One way of achieving this 

is using media access control (MAC) addresses or other endpoint identifiers 

as inputs to the key generation process, which helps ensure that entities 

other than the endpoints in the EAP conversation do not participate in that 

conversation. 

Fast reconnect Optional 

Fast reconnect refers to the ability of an EAP method to refresh a previously 

established security association with fewer messages than required to create 

the initial association.67

In the context of an IEEE 802.11 RSN, man-in-the-middle attack resistance can be among the most 

difficult of the claims to establish. In a typical configuration, the AP resides between the STA and AS, 

and the AS authenticates the AP, using the RADIUS shared secret, during the EAP exchange. An 

authorized and weakly authenticated man-in-the-middle exists under normal operating conditions. In this 

environment, an attacker can easily defeat weak authentication methods by setting up a rogue AP. 

Therefore, it is critical that appropriate EAP methods be selected to eliminate this risk. As Section 6.1.2 

explains, the EAP methods defined in RFC 3748 are vulnerable to man-in-the-middle attacks. Section 

6.1.3 discusses EAP methods that can eliminate the risk of such attacks if implemented properly. 

6.1.2 

 

RFC 3748-Defined EAP Methods 

RFC 3748 establishes how EAP functions and also defines the following three EAP methods, which are 

described later in this section: 

 MD5-Challenge 

 One-Time Password (OTP) 

 Generic Token Card (GTC). 

Other IETF RFCs and Internet-Drafts define additional EAP methods. RFC 3748 requires that all EAP 

implementations support the MD5-Challenge method; support for the other two methods is optional. 

None of the RFC 3748 methods can meet any of the WLAN-required security claims. In some cases, 

however, the RFC 3748 methods are tunneled within the TLS methods discussed in Section 6.1.3. 

66 Packet fragmentation and reassembly services ensure proper functioning of the authentication transaction. Failure to support

this claim might enable an adversary to exploit unintended behavior resulting from large packets, which could include 

bypassing authentication protections or causing a denial of service. 67 The fast reconnect feature improves functionality, not security. Therefore, this claim is considered optional from a security 

perspective. Nevertheless, organizations that expect their users to change associations frequently may have a strong 

preference for EAP methods that can make this claim. 

6-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Therefore, they can still support IEEE 802.11 RSN associations in the context of other methods that meet 

the WLAN-required security claims, but these are the only circumstances in which they can be used 

safely. The RFC 3748 methods are often referred to as legacy methods because more sophisticated EAP 

methods have been developed since the publication of RFC 3748, but MD5-Challenge in particular 

remains widely used, particularly in conjunction with other more secure authentication methods. These 

methods are also used on wired networks, where the eavesdropping threat is believed to be much lower. 

6.1.2.1 MD5-Challenge 

The MD5-Challenge method is based on the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) 

defined in RFC 1994.68 The EAP RFC, RFC 3748, requires implementations to support MD5-Challenge. 

However, IEEE 802.11i requires the EAP method to support mutual authentication in order to avoid manin-the-middle attacks. It cites MD5-Challenge as an example of a method that does not meet this 

requirement.69

Like other challenge-response methods, the primary advantage of MD5-Challenge is that passwords are 

never transmitted in clear text. Instead, the AS provides the STA with challenge text that the STA inputs 

into the MD5 algorithm along with the password. The resulting MD5 hash value is sent back to the AS, 

which performs the same operation as the STA. The MD5 algorithm ensures that the AS’s hash value 

will match the response only if the STA has the correct password. 

Unfortunately, challenge-response methods are vulnerable to offline dictionary attacks and man-in-themiddle attacks unless they are carefully designed, with sufficient entropy in the challenge, keys of the 

appropriate length, a strong hash function, and secure protocol design. In the offline dictionary attack, the 

attacker captures both the challenge and the response and then iteratively cycles through the entries in a 

dictionary of likely passwords, inputting the challenge and each dictionary entry into the MD5 algorithm 

to find a match with the response. If the attacker finds a match, the entry that produced the match is the 

password. In the man-in-the-middle attack, the attacker impersonates the STA to the AS and the AS to 

the STA. This configuration allows the attacker to get the correct response from the STA without the AS 

ever knowing that it did not originate from an authorized entity. 

To mitigate the risk of dictionary and man-in-the-middle attacks, challenge-response methods such as 

MD5-Challenge can be tunneled within a method that encrypts the entire challenge-response sequence. 

In this scenario, the clear text challenge is encrypted, and the encrypted response is encrypted a second 

time. This approach is a common configuration for WLANs that rely on IEEE 802.1X port-based access 

control and is designed to help prevent dictionary and man-in-the-middle attacks. Unfortunately, the 

method used to establish the encrypted tunnel may itself be vulnerable to a man-in-the-middle attack, 

unless the tunnel establishment employs a method based on mutual authentication. If such an attack is 

successful, then the encrypted tunnel no longer hides information from the adversary because the 

adversary established the tunnel in performing the attack and has the keys necessary to encrypt and 

decrypt EAP traffic. Organizations should be aware that it is not possible to eliminate completely the risk 

of successful dictionary or man-in-the-middle attacks for challenge-response methods. 

 

68 For more information on CHAP, see RFC 1994, PPP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) at 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1994.txt. 69 The Wi-Fi Alliance requires EAP-TLS to attain Wi-Fi certification. Therefore, most IEEE 802.11 implementations include 

support for EAP-TLS. 

6-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

6.1.2.2 One-Time Password (OTP) 

The OTP method, which is based on RFC 2289 and RFC 2243,70 involves the use of an identical OTP 

generator on the peer and authenticator. The generator iterates a secure hash function a specified number 

of times using a passphrase and random seed as the initial input. After each successful authentication 

transaction, the number of iterations is reduced by one, resulting in a unique series of passwords. The 

OTP generator can reside on a hardware token or in software on a client computer (e.g., a STA). The 

OTP method cannot make any of the WLAN required security claims, but potentially could be used if it 

were tunneled within another method that can support the required claims. 

6.1.2.3 Generic Token Card (GTC) 

The GTC method is used for hardware token schemes that require user input. The EAP Request contains 

a displayable message, and the EAP Response contains the token-generated information needed for 

authentication. Like MD5-Challenge and OTP, GTC does not support any of the required WLAN 

security claims, but could be used if it were tunneled within another method that can support the required 

claims. 

6.1.3 

 

TLS-Based EAP Methods 

The EAP methods defined in RFC 3748 have a number of serious security shortcomings; one of the most 

significant is that they do not generate key material. Without key material, the WLAN software on the 

STA and AP cannot apply protections to the traffic between STA and AP, as required for WLAN 

security. Consequently, IEEE 802.11 RSN solutions must deploy EAP methods other than those defined 

in RFC 3748 for the networks to be operational, regardless of the level of security desired. RFC 3748 

states that due to the complexity of developing key generation algorithms, EAP methods should be based 

on well-established and analyzed key establishment and generation techniques. In practice, this 

recommendation limits potential methods to those based on the following key establishment and 

generation protocol: Transport Layer Security (TLS),71 a revision of Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), which 

is most commonly used to secure Web site communications. 

TLS has emerged as the dominant protocol for EAP methods that support IEEE 802.11 RSNs. TLS can 

use public key certificates for authentication and secure transfer of key material; it also supports 

authentication via pre-shared keys.72 TLS is designed either to authenticate a server to a client or to 

mutually authenticate the client and server to each other. For a device to be authenticated using TLS, it 

must host a public key certificate or be provisioned with a pre-shared key. In an IEEE 802.11 RSN 

context, if TLS using certificates is used only to authenticate the AS and generate key material, then only 

the AS must possess a certificate. In addition, the STA needs to have a copy of the AS’s certificate in 

order to authenticate the AS. In this scenario, the AS must authenticate the STA using one or more 

additional EAP methods tunneled within the TLS session. However, if TLS with certificates is used for 

mutual authentication, then both the STA and the AS must have certificates. Mutual TLS authentication 

generally is more secure than one-way TLS authentication coupled with one or more additional EAP 

methods. 

70 For more information, see RFC 2289, A One-Time Password System, at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2289.txt, and RFC 2243, 

OTP Extended Responses, at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2243.txt. 71 For more information on TLS, see RFC 2246, The TLS Protocol, Version 1.0, at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2246.txt. 

Another good source of information is NIST SP 800-52, Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Transport Layer Security 

(TLS) Implementations, available at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-52/SP800-52.pdf. 72 IPsec’s IKE has always included authentication using pre-shared secret keys. The TLS Working Group recently adopted 

RFC 4279, Pre-Shared Key Ciphersuites for TLS, to enable both pre-shared key authentication and key derivation.

6-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

The four most commonly used TLS-based EAP methods are as follows: 

 EAP-TLS73

 EAP Tunneled TLS (EAP-TTLS)74 

 Protected EAP (PEAP)75

 EAP Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling (EAP-FAST).76

These methods are described in Sections 6.1.3.1 through 6.1.3.4. 

6.1.3.1 EAP-TLS 

EAP-TLS is defined in RFC 2716, which was published in October 1999. EAP-TLS is considered the 

most secure of the widely supported EAP methods, because it allows strong mutual cryptographic 

authentication of both STA and AS using public key certificates. It is also favored by high-security 

environments because it is not a compound method, unlike PEAP or EAP-TTLS, and therefore does not 

suffer from compound binding problems. To enable mutual authentication, each STA must obtain and 

host its own unique certificate. To provide each STA with its own certificate, organizations should 

maintain a public key infrastructure (PKI). Ideally, the certificate should be stored on a smart card or 

other device that can be removed from the STA, but certificates can also be stored on a STA’s hard disk 

or firmware. Use of the certificate should force the user to enter a personal identification number (PIN), 

password, or passphrase. Otherwise, theft of the STA or card may be all that is needed to authenticate to 

the WLAN. 

Establishing and maintaining a PKI and a smart card infrastructure are not simple endeavors for most 

organizations. Implemented properly, a PKI involves a certificate policy and practice statement, 

certificate and registration authorities, and the maintenance of certificate revocation lists, which are 

needed for denying access when users’ devices are stolen or users no longer have a business need to 

access the network.77 Accordingly, EAP-TLS might be viable only for organizations that already have a 

robust PKI in place or are planning one as part of an enterprise identity management solution. Another 

concern with using EAP-TLS is that its authentication process involves more steps than other methods, so 

its authentication transactions are slower. This can be problematic in environments in which users are 

highly mobile, because users might need to re-authenticate frequently and could be frustrated if 

performance suffers as a result. 

Figure 6-1 shows a hypothetical WLAN that uses the EAP-TLS method for authentication. Certificates 

are located on all of the STAs and the AS. In an infrastructure with several thousand STAs and only 

several ASs, the need for client certificates greatly increases the level of PKI support required. 

 

73 For more information on EAP-TLS, see RFC 2716, PPP EAP TLS Authentication Protocol, at 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2716.txt. 74 For more information on EAP-TTLS, see the draft proposed standard, EAP Tunneled TLS Authentication Protocol Version 

1, dated March 2006, at http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-funk-eap-ttls-v1-xx.txt. 75 At the current time, PEAP is not standardized in an IETF RFC or Internet Draft, but expired Internet Drafts describing 

PEAP are still available. 76 For more information on EAP-FAST, see the draft Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling EAP Method (EAP-FAST), 

dated April 25, 2005, at http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-cam-winget-eap-fast-xx.txt. 77 PKI implementations require a considerable investment in time and resources. It is outside the scope of this document to 

discuss PKI in detail. See NIST SP 800-32, Introduction to Public Key Technology and the Federal PKI Infrastructure, for 

more information; it is available at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-32/sp800-32.pdf. Another document that 

might be helpful is The DoD Public Key Infrastructure and Public Key-Enabling Frequently Asked Questions. Although the 

document focuses on the Department of Defense PKI, its descriptions of PKI components are applicable to other 

environments. The document is located at http://iase.disa.mil/pki/faq-pki-pke-may-2004.doc. 

6-7
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 6-1. Illustration of EAP-TLS Environment 

Several WLAN vendors support EAP-TLS in their STA software. Microsoft also supports a version of 

EAP-TLS in its Windows XP operating system. 

6.1.3.2 EAP-TTLS 

EAP-TTLS extends EAP-TLS to allow for one-way TLS authentication in addition to mutual TLS 

authentication. When one-way authentication is used, the AS is authenticated to the STA in a TLS 

handshake, which also creates an encrypted tunnel between the STA and AS. The tunnel is then used to 

protect a second authentication transaction in which the STA is authenticated to the AS. In EAP-TTLS, 

this second transaction is called an inner authentication method and occurs in what are termed 

InnerApplication messages. These messages consist of a series of attribute-value pairs (AVP) that 

describe the inner application and specify the standard protocols and algorithms that support it. The AVP 

format is compatible with RADIUS, thereby enabling easy integration with existing authentication 

protocols that RADIUS supports. The AVP format is extensible, allowing new inner applications and 

corresponding AVPs to be defined as needed. Currently supported inner applications include EAP 

methods, CHAP,78 and PAP. When the inner application is another EAP method, it is referred to as the 

inner EAP method. 

The use of EAP-TTLS is similar to Web sites that establish a protected channel, and then prompt for a 

username and password. The client computer first uses TLS to validate the Web server’s certificate and 

establish an encrypted session with the server. At that point, passwords sent to the Web server are 

encrypted and therefore protected from eavesdropping. EAP-TTLS operates in a similar manner; the 

STA validates the AS’s certificate and uses the resulting TLS session to transfer user credentials securely. 

Figure 6-2 shows a hypothetical WLAN that uses the EAP-TTLS method for authentication. The 

configuration is identical to the EAP-TLS example in Figure 6-1, but in this case a certificate is present 

on the AS only. 

 

78 EAP-TTLS also supports the Microsoft variants of CHAP, namely MS-CHAP and MS-CHAPv2. CHAP and MS-CHAP are 

considered insecure, but MS-CHAPv2 provides adequate security for medium assurance applications. It also supports PAP, 

which is not secure if used on its own. However, in combination with the outer TLS tunnel, it may be adequate with 

substantial network engineering devoted to its security. 

6-8
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 6-2. Illustration of EAP-TTLS Environment 

An advantage of EAP-TTLS relative to EAP-TLS is that it can support legacy authentication methods, 

using them as the inner authentication method. For example, if an organization has mature security 

processes and a large investment in an existing identity management system based on passwords, tokens, 

or biometrics, then it might make sense to leverage that system for its WLANs. It might appear that 

eliminating the requirement for certificates on STAs (the clients) greatly reduces the administrative 

complexity of the required supporting PKI; installing certificates on a small number of ASs is 

considerably easier than installing them on hundreds or thousands of computers or smart cards. However, 

the root certificate must be delivered securely to every client to prevent man-in-the-middle attacks. Many 

desktop operating systems include system management tools for the distribution of root certificates to 

clients. Alternatively, root certificate distribution can be accomplished by the IT department when 

configuring computers for end users. 

The TLS tunnel protects the inner application from several attack types, including replay attacks and 

dictionary attacks. Unfortunately, it does not always offer strong assurance against man-in-the-middle 

attacks. Another shortcoming of EAP-TTLS is that it is only as strong as the inner application 

authentication method that occurs within the TLS tunnel. For instance, if EAP-TTLS is used with a 

legacy system that allows weak passwords, then that implementation of EAP-TTLS is weak, which in 

turn means the IEEE 802.1X port-based access control that relies on that implementation of EAP-TTLS is 

weak. In a cascading fashion, the strength of nearly all elements’ RSN protections is rooted in the 

strength of the EAP-TTLS inner application to authenticate the STA, which is left unspecified. 

Therefore, organizations that implement EAP-TTLS should carefully consider the risks associated with 

any candidate method before deploying it. 

6.1.3.3 PEAP 

PEAP is the product of a joint development effort by engineers from Microsoft, Cisco Systems, and 

Extundo. PEAP’s characteristics are very similar to EAP-TTLS. Like EAP-TTLS, PEAP uses 

certificates and leverages TLS only to verify the AS’s identity to the STA and establish a secure 

communications channel to protect the transaction in which the STA authenticates to the AS. As with 

EAP-TTLS, no client certificates are required; however, provisioning the root certificate on each and 

every client is a mandatory security requirement. 

6-9
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

The main difference between EAP-TTLS and PEAP is that PEAP’s tunneled authentication transaction is 

another EAP method rather than an exchange of AVPs. These tunneled EAP methods, also called inner 

EAP methods, might be an RFC 3748 method or a more recently developed EAP method. In practice, this 

distinction usually is not important because both EAP-TTLS and PEAP can run on any network topology 

or protocol, are compatible with RADIUS, and can interoperate with any AP, none of which require 

method-specific code. 

Given the similarities between EAP-TTLS and PEAP, it is possible that one will emerge as a de facto 

standard while the other becomes superfluous, but it is unclear which is more likely to become the 

standard at this time. A number of vendors are implementing EAP-TTLS in their WLAN products, and 

EAP-TTLS client software is available for most major operating systems (e.g., Linux, Mac OS, Microsoft 

Windows). PEAP has strong support from both Microsoft and Cisco Systems, which could encourage 

other vendors to implement PEAP in their solutions. In addition, Microsoft Windows XP provides native 

support for PEAP, but not EAP-TTLS. Organizations that require EAP-TTLS for Windows XP STAs 

need to procure third-party software; an open-source EAP-TTLS plug-in is available for the native 

Windows supplicant. Also, the Windows version of PEAP supports MS-CHAPv2 only, which currently 

limits its use to authentication with Microsoft domains or Active Directory. Organizations that need 

PEAP to interoperate with third-party ASs need to procure compatible third-party PEAP client software. 

Unfortunately, there are different non-interoperable implementations of PEAP, so organizations should 

take care that their server and client versions are compatible; they must also be compatible with the 

method used to store user accounts on the backend authentication database. Both versions should also 

fulfill the organization’s security requirements. 

New industry developments could change the relative merits of each method. Neither EAP-TTLS nor 

PEAP has been approved as an IETF standard; EAP-TTLS is defined in an Internet-Draft, but the PEAP 

Internet Draft has expired. Given the rapid changes in this area, organizations are encouraged to obtain 

the latest information before selecting one of these methods. 

6.1.3.4 EAP-FAST 

EAP-FAST was developed by Cisco Systems. What distinguishes EAP-FAST from other TLS-based 

methods is that it establishes the encrypted tunnel using what it calls a Protected Access Credential 

(PAC), which is effectively a pre-shared key; alternatively, a public key certificate can be used. The 

tunnel is then used to protect an inner EAP method, much like PEAP.79 The use of PACs eliminates the 

need to have certificates on either the STA or AS. The protocol also includes mechanisms for refreshing 

PACs after a successful authentication. EAP-FAST is especially suitable for unsophisticated devices that 

might not have the computing power to perform TLS handshakes frequently without adversely impacting 

the user’s experience. For example, EAP-FAST might enable household appliances, vending machines, 

and other small devices not typically connected to WLANs today to participate in IEEE 802.11 RSNs 

more cheaply and efficiently than they could with other EAP methods. 

The major problem with EAP-FAST is initializing each STA with its first PAC. Provisioning initial 

PACs is not easier than provisioning certificates. Cisco has implemented features on its WLAN 

equipment that can provision PACs securely, but they involve having a digital certificate on the AS, 

which must be installed on each client before it can be used. Given these limitations, EAP-FAST in 

practice has similar PKI requirements to EAP-TTLS and PEAP, even if the certificates are not used in the 

EAP conversation itself. The alternative, easier method of PAC provisioning, does not require 

 

79 Unlike PEAP and TTLS, EAP-FAST prevents man-in-the-middle attacks through the cryptographic binding of the tunnel 

and the inner EAP methods. 

6-10
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

certificates, but is also not secure. Currently, Cisco is the only vendor supporting EAP-FAST, but it might 

gain wider appeal if it becomes an official IETF standard. 

6.1.4 Summary of EAP Methods and Security Claims 

Table 6-2 reviews the security claims of each of the EAP methods discussed in Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3. 

None of the RFC 3748 EAP methods can make any of the relevant security claims, but these methods can 

serve as an inner EAP method when tunneled inside one of the TLS methods. 

Table 6-2. Summary of Security Claims for Selected EAP Methods 

EAP Method 

Security Claim RFC 3748 Methods TLS-Based Methods 

MD5 OTP GTC EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP EAP-FAST 

Key derivation No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Key strength N/A N/A N/A Yes Yes Variable Yes 

Mutual authentication No No No Yes 

Depends on 

implementation 

Depends on 

implementation 

Yes 

Shared state 

equivalence80 No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Dictionary attack 

resistance No N/A No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Man-in-the-middle attack 

resistance81 No No82 No Yes 

Depends on 

implementation83

Depends on 

implementation84

Yes 

Protected ciphersuite 

negotiation No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Fragmentation No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Confidentiality85 No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Channel binding No No No N/A86 Optional

Depends on 

implementation

No

Fast reconnect No No No 

Depends 

on 

implementation 

Yes Yes Yes 

As Table 6-2 shows, the TLS methods provide similar security claims, primarily because TLS protections 

offer the basis for most of these claims. The main difference between them is the level of PKI support 

required, which is summarized in Table 6-3. Also, EAP-FAST can be configured to use non-certificatebased shared secrets such as pre-shared keys. Another difference between the methods is the level of 

 

80 This claim is not defined in RFC 3748, Section 7.2.1, but appears as a mandatory requirement in [STANLEY]. 81 Man-in-the-middle attack resistance is a combination of several RFC 3748 security claims. Table 6-1 has a footnote that 

contains a more detailed discussion of the various security claims behind man-in-the-middle attack resistance. 82 EAP-OTP offers replay protection only. 

83 EAP-TTLSv1 is resistant to man-in-the-middle attacks, but it is currently not widely implemented. 84 PEAPv2 is resistant to man-in-the-middle attacks and includes channel binding, but it is currently not widely implemented. 85 RFC 3748 notes that to make the claim of confidentiality, a method must support identity protection. The Internet-Draft 

RFC EAP Method Requirements for Wireless LANs refers to this concept as “end user identity hiding”. 86 EAP-TLS does not require channel binding, since it performs authentication as part of the TLS channel. 

6-11
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

vendor support they receive. EAP-TTLS and PEAP are emerging as the industry-preferred EAP methods 

for WLANs. EAP-FAST is currently a Cisco-proprietary approach but could gain a wider following if its 

Internet Draft progresses to RFC status. 

Table 6-3. Characteristics of Common TLS-Based EAP Methods for WLANs 

Characteristic EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP EAP-FAST 

AS Certificate Required Required Required Optional 

STA Certificate Required Optional Optional None 

Tunneled Authentication 

Protocols N/A 

Any method defined in an 

attribute-value pair using the 

RADIUS namespace 

EAP EAP 

6.2 Developing an EAP Method Strategy 

None of the EAP methods offers the best solution for all environments; the selection of an EAP method 

depends on several factors, including whether an organization intends to leverage existing enterprise 

authentication infrastructure for its WLAN authentication transactions. If an existing user database is to 

be used, the EAP method must be compatible with the format in which user credentials are stored. 

Nothing in the standards that define RSNs—including IEEE 802.11i, IEEE 802.1X, and EAP—requires 

that STAs and ASs support more than one EAP method.87 However, the Wi-Fi Alliance requires EAPTLS for certification. Some products support more options than others. Accordingly, organizations 

should thoroughly understand their authentication requirements before designing RSNs and procuring 

WLAN equipment. They should also be aware of any security policy or infrastructure limitations 

inherent in the existing authentication infrastructure that they might want to leverage for RSN 

authentication. For example, if they currently maintain a AAA server that by policy is configured to 

support either tokens or certificates, but not passwords, then they might seek STAs that can work within 

those constraints. If a password-based system over EAP is selected, the cryptographic protection of the 

outer TLS tunnel should be extended as far as possible, preferably all the way to the authentication server, 

but at least to a trusted secure network. This applies to both TTLS and PEAP. Finally, they may want to 

conduct a risk assessment of various options of EAP methods before selecting one. Some questions that 

organizations should address before choosing an EAP method are discussed in Table 6-4. 

6.3 EAP Security Considerations 

The RSN framework specifies the use of IEEE 802.1X authentication and EAP, but leaves a number of 

critical security implementation details to the discretion of the organization implementing the framework. 

Potential problems include an adversary impersonating an AP, capturing wireless authentication traffic as 

it travels over the network between the AP and AS, and exploiting AS security vulnerabilities. This 

section discusses some of the risks associated with improper implementations and how to mitigate those 

risks. 

 

87 This EAP method, MD5-Challenge, is described in Section 6.1.2.1. 

6-12
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 6-4. Questions for Identifying an Appropriate EAP Method 

Question Analysis 

Does the WLAN solution need to 

support guest users? 

Organizations that want to use WLAN technology to provide connectivity to 

business partners, customers, and guests need an RSN solution based on 

an EAP method for which there is nearly universal support across potential 

clients. This requirement effectively limits the selection of EAP methods to 

those that are supported natively by Microsoft Windows, given its widespread 

use. Microsoft Windows (XP or newer) supports PEAP and a native version 

of EAP-TLS. PEAP provides the best support for guest users because it 

does not require the presence of a client certificate. However, it does not 

eliminate the requirement to deploy the root certificate on the client. Also, 

the guest user’s PEAP must be compatible with the organizational server’s 

PEAP, and care should be taken that neither version contains known 

vulnerabilities. EAP-TTLS provides better support for guest users, since it 

does not require client certificates, does not have PEAP’s version 

incompatibilities, and EAP-TTLS/PAP can be used with any user 

authentication database. 

Will the WLAN solution support 

equipment from multiple WLAN 

vendors? 

The greater the interoperability requirement, the greater the need to use a 

commonly used EAP method such as EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS or PEAP. 

Proprietary solutions can commit an organization to a single vendor and can 

complicate upgrades and migrations. 

Does the organization currently 

have a PKI? Does it issue client 

certificates? 

The presence of a PKI greatly facilitates the use of certificate-based methods 

that require each STA to have a certificate, such as EAP-TLS. EAP-TLS is 

thus an attractive option if the PKI issues client certificates. If no PKI is 

available, then the organization should obtain a server certificate from an 

external PKI provider or consider secure password-based EAP methods. 

Does the organization deploy 

smart cards and readers? 

If a smart card infrastructure is already in place, EAP-TLS generally offers 

the greatest security. Support for smart card-based EAP-TLS solutions is 

native to recent versions of Microsoft Windows. Alternatively, the session 

resumption features of PEAP/EAP-TLS or TTLS/EAP-TLS permit the STA to 

remain connected when roaming, without having to leave the smart card (i.e. 

ID badge) in the reader all of the time. 

Does the organization have an 

enterprise identity management 

system? 

If the organization has an enterprise identity management system, then there 

are probably strong security and cost incentives to leverage that system. 

The appropriate EAP method to deploy depends on the characteristics of the 

identity management infrastructure. 

Does the organization need to 

support legacy authentication 

methods? 

If a requirement for a legacy authentication method exists, then this method 

should be protected in a TLS session, especially if the legacy method sends 

authentication credentials in clear text. EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, and PEAP 

all provide support for TLS tunneling. 

Does the organization need to use 

an existing user database? 

If an existing user database is to be used, the EAP method must be 

compatible with the format in which user credentials are stored. 

Is the organization especially 

concerned about the overall cost 

of the solution? 

Certificate-based EAP methods are more costly to implement and maintain 

than password-based methods. 

Does the organization require a 

high assurance WLAN solution? 

High assurance solutions should consist of strong two-factor cryptographic 

authentication. One approach to achieve this requirement is EAP-TLS with 

certificates on PIN or password-protected smart cards. Another approach is 

PEAP or EAP-TTLS with Generic Token Card (GTC) or possibly a biometric 

solution. 

6-13
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

6.3.1 

6.3.2 

Secure STA Configuration 

EAP authentication methods such as EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, and PEAP use certificates to 

authenticate the AS to the STA. One potential pitfall to this approach is that it enables an adversary to 

impersonate the WLAN infrastructure if that adversary can present a valid certificate, and if WLAN 

clients are not configured properly. It is common for a WLAN client to be configured by default to 

accept certificates signed by any certification authority (CA) for which it has a corresponding CA 

certificate. In most cases, a variety of third-party CA certificates are already installed on the client. This 

allows an attacker to impersonate the WLAN infrastructure successfully with an SSID and a valid 

certificate signed by any of the third-party CAs that the client recognizes. Once the attacker has tricked 

the client into associating with the bogus AP, it might be able to capture the authentication credentials 

needed to access the real infrastructure. In this scenario, the security of the RSN is circumvented simply 

as a result of having multiple CA certificates on the STA, which is a common configuration on many 

computers. 

To prevent this situation, STAs should be configured to authenticate to specific servers only, not just any 

server with a valid certificate. Ideally, servers should be identified by their fully qualified domain name 

(e.g., as1.xyzAgency.gov) so that the name listed in the AS’s certificate can be compared with the name 

specified in the STA’s configuration. STAs should also be configured to accept certificates only from the 

CA that signed the server certificates. With these two controls in place, the attacker would either have to 

breach the CA or get it to provide it a certificate with the same name as the authentication server. Both of 

these attacks are considerably more difficult to execute successfully than the relatively trivial one 

described earlier. As an additional security measure, an organization might consider using its own CA 

rather than that of a third-party vendor, if it does not trust the third party to implement the proper controls. 

This approach requires installing the organization’s CA certificate on each STA. 

Figure 6-3 shows an example of certificate restrictions on a computer running Microsoft Windows XP 

Professional. The computer is configured to use EAP-TLS when connecting to a certain SSID, and to 

accept server certificates signed by either the Symantec Root CA or the Thawte Personal Basic CA. 

Nothing in the IEEE 802.11i specification or related standards requires a configuration like this one, but it 

is essential when a client authenticates the WLAN infrastructure using certificates. Organizations 

deploying RSNs should consider carefully the configuration of their STAs before activating a new 

wireless RSN. 

Unprotected Links 

The infrastructure supporting an RSN authentication transaction consists of three components: a STA, an 

AP, and an AS. IEEE 802.11i provides a rigorous approach to securing the communications link between 

the STA and the AP. IEEE 802.1X port-based access control ensures that entities on the STA-side of the 

AP cannot reach the AS-side of the AP prior to successful authentication. However, both standards 

explicitly state that protection of the communications link between the AP and the AS is out of their 

scope. Therefore, organizations deploying RSNs must focus on this gap to ensure the end-to-end security 

of the WLAN solution. Figure 6-4 illustrates the problem. 

6-14
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 6-3. Certificate Properties Dialog Box 

EAP traffic can be transmitted in the clear between the AP and AS and still not violate IEEE 802.11i 

specifications. If attackers have access to that communications link, they might be able to view or 

manipulate traffic in a manner that would allow them to compromise WLAN security. Also, since the 

key is distributed from the AS to the AP, the key distribution mechanism must be secure. To prevent 

attackers from viewing or manipulating traffic, organizations should ensure that traffic between the AP 

and AS is protected sufficiently through cryptography. Ways to accomplish this are as follows: 

 Establish a dedicated virtual private network (VPN) between the AP and AS using a VPN 

protocol such as IPsec.88

 Use tunneled EAP methods only, such as EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, and PEAP. 

 Use appropriate key wrapping mechanisms to distribute the key.89

 

88 For additional information on IPsec VPNs, see NIST SP 800-77, Guide to IPsec VPNs, available at 

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-77/sp800-77.pdf. 89 One example can be found in RADIUS Attributes for Key Delivery (http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-zorn-radiuskeywrap-xx.txt). AES Key Wrap is specified in RFC 3394, Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Key Wrap Algorithm, 

available at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3394.txt. 

6-15
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 6-4. Standard IEEE 802.11 RSN Authentication Infrastructure 

6.3.3 Attacks on the Authentication Server 

Operating system security was not a major concern for pre-RSN WLANs because of the limited 

functionality of most APs. In an RSN, the core STA authentication function is performed on a separate 

authentication server, which typically runs on a sophisticated operating system such as UNIX, Linux, or 

Windows. A breach of the operating system or an application or service with operating system privileges 

could lead to a complete compromise of RSN security. Accordingly, WLAN security should include 

hardening of the servers that support the authentication process.90

6.4 EAP Multiplexing Model and Related Support Requirements 

This section provides additional information on the conceptual architecture of EAP for readers seeking a 

better understanding of how EAP works and how it interacts with other protocols. Readers who do not 

need this information should skip this section and proceed to Section 6.5. 

RFC 3748 provides a framework for EAP using a four-layer conceptual model described in Table 6-5. It 

is called the EAP multiplexing model because it describes how EAP can handle multiple EAP methods in 

the same EAP implementation. 

Table 6-5. EAP Multiplexing Model 

Model Layer Description 

Method Layer 

Implements the specified EAP method, which performs the actual authentication 

transaction. During an EAP dialog, an EAP method on the peer communicates with 

the equivalent EAP method on the authenticator. 

Peer/Authenticator Layer 

Forwards EAP packets between the EAP layer and the appropriate EAP method. 

STAs and ASs that mutually authenticate one another serve in both the peer and 

authenticator roles. APs serve as pass-through authenticators, proxying traffic for 

both the STA and the AS when they serve in the authenticator role. 

EAP Layer 

Manages the EAP dialog—receiving and transmitting EAP packets via the lower 

layer, detecting duplicate packets, retransmitting packets when necessary, and 

handling communication with the EAP peer or authenticator. EAP packets 

containing request, success, or failure notices are delivered to the peer layer; EAP 

packets containing responses to requests are delivered to the authenticator layer. 

Lower Layer Responsible for encapsulating and transmitting EAP frames between the peer and 

the authenticator. 

 

90 Checklists and implementation guides for securing various server operating systems are available from NIST’s Security 

Configuration Checklists Program for IT Products at http://checklists.nist.gov/. 

6-16
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

In a typical IEEE 802.11 RSN configuration, communication flows through the four layers as shown in 

Figure 6-5. Messages traveling between layers within a device are transported logically within the 

device’s EAP software implementation. Flows between devices occur over a network using lower-layer 

protocols. Communication flows occur in both directions, as shown by the arrows in the figure. For 

example, when the EAP method on the AS generates a request, the EAP method on the STA responds to 

that request. When the AS receives the response, it replies with either a success or failure message, 

accompanied by key material in the case of success. The Peer/Authenticator layer on each device 

determines whether to pass the message through (in the case of an AP) or forward it to the appropriate 

EAP method (in the case of the STA and AS). The EAP layer packages the messages for the lower layer 

protocols, which are typically IEEE 802.11 or RADIUS. 

Model Layer STA

AP

AS 

Method Layer EAP Method EAP Method 

Peer/Authenticator 

Layer 

EAP 

Peer/ 

Authenticator 

EAP Authenticator EAP 

Peer/ 

Authenticator 

EAP Layer EAP Layer EAP Layer EAP Layer 

Lower Layer IEEE 802.11 Wired network protocols 

Figure 6-5. EAP Traffic Flow in IEEE 802.11 RSN 

EAP implementations differ considerably for the method and lower layers, but are very similar for the 

middle two layers. Organizations need to determine how to implement the method and lower layers in 

their environments, which involves selecting one or more EAP methods (discussed previously in Section 

6.2) and establishing the protocols that the AS will use to transport authentication messages. Typical 

support requirements and configurations for each of the key WLAN components are discussed in Table 

6-6. The AP does not need to support EAP methods, but it must support the lower layer communications 

protocols of both the STA and AS. 

An important concept at the lower layer is EAP encapsulation, which describes how EAP packets are 

transferred between peer and authenticator. The encapsulation method can differ depending on the 

network environment. The most common form of EAP encapsulation in IP networks is EAP over 

RADIUS.91 In a typical WLAN configuration, the AS either hosts the AAA database or acts as a “front 

end to the real user database, which might be Active Directory, LDAP, Kerberos, or numerous other 

alternatives; the AS uses RADIUS to communicate with STAs and other devices. For this reason, the AS 

is often called the RADIUS or AAA server. 

 

91 For more information on EAP over RADIUS, see RFC 3579, RADIUS Support for EAP, at 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3579.txt. 

6-17
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 6-6. EAP Support Requirements for WLAN Components 

WLAN Component 

Requirement Area 

STA AP AS 

EAP Method 

Support 

Each peer can support 

multiple EAP methods, but 

there must be at least one 

method in common with the 

AS for a dialog to occur. 

Supported EAP methods 

may be native to an 

operating system or 

bundled with third-party 

WLAN software. 

The AP does not support 

EAP methods. It merely 

passes EAP messages 

between the STA and AS. 

Some APs filter EAP 

methods that they do not 

allow, although this violates 

RFC 3748. 

The AS is typically a AAA 

server that supports RADIUS 

and one or more EAP 

methods. It can require that 

the STA use particular EAP 

methods to authenticate 

successfully. 

Peer/Authenticator 

Layer Support 

EAP Layer Support 

The middle layers are implemented in software resident on each of the components of the 

WLAN solution. Organizations do not have configuration options with respect to the middle 

layers. 

Lower Layer 

Support 

The lower layer between the STA and AP 

is the EAP over LAN (EAPOL) protocol 

using IEEE 802.11 for media access 

control and data link communications. 

The lower layer between the AP and the AS is 

likely to be RADIUS over IP. In cases in 

which the network between the AP and AS is 

not an IP network, EAPOL using another IEEE 

802-series link layer protocol is the most 

common approach. 

In some implementations, the STA does not have access to IP network services until it successfully 

authenticates with an AS. When IP services are unavailable, the most common approach is to use EAP 

over LAN (EAPOL) encapsulation, which enables EAP to be transported in the frames of IEEE 802 link 

layer protocols. EAPOL is defined in IEEE 802.1X. The WLAN vendor’s EAP implementation typically 

will determine whether the transport mechanism is EAP over RADIUS or EAPOL. 

6.5 Summary 

Defined in RFC 3748, EAP is used during the authentication phase of an IEEE 802.11 RSN and provides 

the authentication framework for IEEE 802.11 RSNs that use IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. 

EAP can be adapted to new authentication methods as they become available and can operate over a 

variety of different network and link layer protocols, including IP and IEEE 802-series medium access 

protocols. For these reasons, EAP is well-suited to providing authentication services for WLANs. 

EAP defines the stages of an EAP conversation that consists of one or more EAP methods. The EAP 

methods perform the authentication transaction and generate key material. While the basic rules of the 

EAP conversation are common to all EAP implementations, the EAP methods can vary from one 

implementation to another, requiring different levels of user interaction, using different authentication 

methods, and employing different cipher suites. This flexibility has benefits, but it may also introduce 

risk. To maintain security, organizations should select EAP methods appropriate to their environment. 

IANA has defined numerous EAP method types, but not all of these are appropriate for WLAN 

applications. For example, RFC 3748 defines three methods—MD5-Challenge, One-Time Password, and 

Generic Token Card—but none of these can satisfy the necessary security requirements for WLANs. 

6-18
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

TLS-based methods such as EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP, and EAP-FAST provide more robust 

alternatives that can satisfy these requirements. The primary distinction between them is the level of PKI 

support required. EAP-TLS requires both STAs and ASs to possess valid certificates. EAP-TTLS and 

PEAP can support configurations with AS certificates only. EAP-FAST can support EAP authentication 

with certificates or, alternatively, with no certificates, instead using PACs, a type of pre-shared keys. 

Before organizations select WLAN equipment, they should review their existing identity management 

infrastructure, authentication requirements, and security policy to determine the EAP method or methods 

that are most appropriate in their environment, then purchase systems that support the chosen EAP 

methods. 

Many EAP methods are currently defined only in IETF Internet-Drafts and thus are not yet official 

standards. Organizations are encouraged to obtain the latest available information before making final 

determinations on their IEEE 802.11 RSN authentication architecture and product procurement. 

6-19
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

6-20
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

7. FIPS and WLAN Product Certifications 

Federal agencies are required to use FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms that are contained in FIPSvalidated cryptographic modules. As mentioned in Section 2.1.2, Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and 

WPA2 are security specifications developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a consortium of wireless product 

vendors that certifies the interoperability of WLAN products through its Wi-Fi CERTIFIEDTM testing and 

branding program. This section describes FIPS 140-2 certification as it applies to 802.11 wireless 

networks. It also provides an overview of the Wi-Fi Alliance certification programs, with an emphasis on 

WPA and WPA2. Organizations planning to deploy RSNs should understand the FIPS requirements and 

the WPA and WPA2 certifications so that they can procure products with the certification levels that best 

match their WLAN requirements. 

7.1 FIPS 140-2 Certification 

If a Federal Government wireless network requires security protection, then the data traversing the 

network must be protected in one of two ways: 

 The wireless equipment (APs and STAs) must be FIPS 140-2 certified and must operate in FIPS 

mode. 

 The data on the wireless network must be protected by a VPN. The most common choice is an 

IPsec VPNs. The VPN’s crypto modules must be FIPS 140-2 certified. 

In circumstances in which a wired network would not require security protection, a wireless network can 

also operate without the required security protections. Some examples of this are: 

 A wireless network in a conference room that is not connected to either the agency’s internal 

network or to the Internet, which is provided to enable conference participants to communicate 

with each other. 

 A wireless network, connected to the Internet outside of the agency’s firewall. Unprotected 

clients that connect to the wireless network would be able to access the Internet, but accessing the 

agency’s internal network would require security protection. 

The above requirements cover protection of the data traversing a wireless network. Authenticating to the 

network using 802.1X and EAP is somewhat more complicated since EAP standardization is in a state of 

flux. The IETF’s EAP Method Update (emu) working group is working to standardize EAP-TLS and to 

extend it so that it will meet the needs of today’s wireless and other applications but still be backwardcompatible with EAP-TLS as defined in RFC 2716. NIST has not standardized on a particular EAP 

method, so there is no EAP-related FIPS. NIST’s Implementation Guidance for FIPS PUB 140-292 allows 

the use of EAP methods based on the TLS protocol (or on SSL v3.1, but not on previous versions of SSL) 

or on EAP-TLS. Thus, EAP methods that satisfy that requirement and are accepted as secure by the 

wireless industry may be used by government agencies. Since the RADIUS server is responsible for many 

of the cryptographic security operations in 802.11i, government agencies are required to purchase 

RADIUS servers whose crypto modules are FIPS-validated. 

 

92 Implementation Guidance for FIPS PUB 140-2 and the Cryptographic Module Validation Program can be found at 

http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/140-1/FIPS1402IG.pdf. 

7-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

7.2 Wi-Fi Alliance Certification Programs 

The Wi-Fi Alliance began conducting interoperability testing in April 2000 and has since awarded its WiFi CERTIFIED label to over 2,500 WLAN products. Product categories include access points and a wide 

variety of clients, including embedded systems, internal and external wireless network interface cards, 

Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices, and printers. Table 7-1 reviews the three basic types of 

certifications: radio standards, network security, and multimedia content support. Radio standard 

certifications involve the electrical engineering aspects of WLAN communications, such as the frequency, 

power, and modulation of radio signals and the rules by which STAs contend for available channels. The 

certifications for network security, the subject of this guidance document, cover topics such as 

authentication and confidentiality services. Multimedia content support refers to quality of service 

mechanisms that give priority to streaming audio and video over other data, which helps prevent users 

from experiencing irregular, intermittent multimedia content delivery. To address quality of service 

interoperability issues, the Wi-Fi Alliance created its Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) certification. 

Table 7-1. Wi-Fi Alliance Certification Programs 

Certification Type Resulting Certification Label Underlying Standard 

A IEEE 802.11a 

Radio standards B IEEE 802.11b 

G IEEE 802.11g 

WPA IEEE 802.11i (subset) Network security WPA2 IEEE 802.11i 

Multimedia content support Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) IEEE 802.11e (subset) 

All Wi-Fi CERTIFIEDTM products must pass interoperability testing with at least one of the radio 

standards. Otherwise, there would be no assurance that the products could perform their core function of 

WLAN communications. The network security and multimedia content support certifications supplement 

the radio standards certification. WPA compliance was initially optional for Wi-Fi CERTIFIEDTM

products, but was subsequently made mandatory. As of March 1, 2006, WPA2 compliance is mandatory; 

however, there is a grandfather clause for products that were certified WPA-compliant before that date. 

Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) compliance is likely to remain optional for the foreseeable future. 

The Wi-Fi Alliance also manages a licensing program for Wi-Fi providers called Wi-Fi Zone. 

Organizations participating in the program agree to use Wi-Fi CERTIFIEDTM products only and adhere to 

certain service standards. Customers that see the Wi-Fi Zone logo at an establishment offering Wi-Fi 

services are offered assurance that they can connect securely and reliably to the Internet. The Wi-Fi 

Alliance’s Web Page (http://certifications.wi-fi.org/wbcs_certified_products.php) contains a search 

engine that allows viewers to search for various types of wireless equipment that conforms to some or all 

of its Certification Programs. 

7.3 Wi-Fi Alliance Network Security Certifications 

WPA and WPA2 are the network security certifications offered by the Wi-Fi Alliance. This section 

describes these certifications and highlights their differences. It also explains the different certification 

levels available for both WPA and WPA2: Personal, which uses a pre-shared key for authentication; and 

Enterprise, which certifies the use of EAP authentication in addition to pre-shared key. 

7-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

7.3.1 WPA Features 

The Wi-Fi Alliance introduced WPA in early 2003 to address serious vulnerabilities inherent in WEP, 

which was the only available IEEE 802.11 security protection at that time. WPA is a subset93 of IEEE 

802.11i that provides a solution to WEP’s major problems. To accomplish this protection, WPA 

leverages the following core security features from IEEE 802.11i: 

 IEEE 802.1X and EAP authentication 

 Key generation and distribution based on the IEEE 802.11i 4-Way Handshake 

 TKIP mechanisms including 

– Encapsulation and decapsulation 

– Replay protection 

– Michael MIC integrity protection. 

Table 7-2 summarizes the primary features provided by IEEE 802.11i that are not included in the WPA 

test criteria. Organizations that have deployed WPA-compliant equipment can still support IEEE 802.11i 

RSNs based on TKIP; however, organizations need to determine if the absence of the features not present 

in WPA is acceptable in their environment. For government organizations, where FIPS compliance is 

required, this is not acceptable. 

Table 7-2. IEEE 802.11i Features Not Present in WPA 

Feature Discussion 

IBSS support WPA does not cover RSN peer-to-peer relationships (i.e., those without 

APs), also known as ad hoc mode, but this configuration is not common in 

most enterprises. 

Secure fast94 handoff 

(through Pre-Authentication 

and PMKSA caching) 

This capability allows users to move from one BSS to another without 

having to go through the entire authentication process each time. 

Organizations whose users are expected to migrate between various 

BSSs frequently (e.g., more than once an hour) may require secure fast 

handoff to avoid a situation in which users demand a weakening of 

security requirements to improve performance when they are mobile. 

AES-CCMP encapsulation WPA does not require support for AES-CCMP because the AES-related 

portions of 802.11i were not sufficiently specified when WPA was 

released. In most cases, pre-WPA products can achieve WPA-level 

security with a software upgrade. However, organizations that require 

FIPS-validated encryption need to procure WLAN products that use FIPSvalidated AES-CCMP modules. 

7.3.2 

 

WPA2 Features 

Released in September 2004, WPA2 is the Wi-Fi Alliance’s interoperability certification program for the 

complete ratified version of IEEE 802.11i. If a product holds the WPA2 certification, it complies 

completely with the IEEE 802.11 standard as amended by IEEE 802.11i and should work seamlessly with 

other WPA2-certified products under most operating conditions. Also, WPA2 is backward compatible 

93 There are some subtle differences between the TKIP in WPA and in IEEE 802.11i, and the 4-Way Handshake. The WPA 

suites are also identified by a different OUI than the IEEE 802.11i suites. 94 In reality, Pre-Authentication and PMKSA caching are not considered to provide a sufficiently fast handoff to support layer 

2 mobility; this was one of the motivations for creating the IEEE 802.11r Task Group, Fast Roaming/Fast BSS Transition. 

7-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

with WPA, so any WPA2 product should be able to interoperate with a WPA product.95 Some products 

may require a hardware upgrade to achieve WPA2 compliance; older products, in general, cannot be 

upgraded to WPA2. 

WPA2 testing validates interoperability with selected EAP methods only, so WPA2 certification does not 

imply interoperability with all possible EAP methods. Currently, certification involves interoperability 

testing with the following EAP methods: 

 EAP-TLS 

 EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 

 PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2 

 PEAPv1/EAP-GTC 

 EAP Subscriber Identity Module (EAP-SIM). 

When a method is listed with a “/”, the first term is the actual EAP method, and the second term is the 

inner method tunneled within it. The Alliance may add to this list over time. Organizations procuring 

WPA2 products should either select EAP methods from the tested list or conduct their own 

interoperability testing on the equipment with their own authentication infrastructures. 

WPA2 certification does not currently exist for products providing AS functionality. When the Alliance 

conducts its interoperability testing, it uses AAA servers running leading implementations of RADIUS 

and the tested EAP methods, but does not publicize which these are. If an organization selects a AAA 

server running a different implementation of RADIUS or the chosen EAP method, then there is no 

guarantee of interoperability. Conducting independent testing in enterprise environments is advised. 

Because Federal agencies are required to use encryption algorithms that are FIPS-approved, such as AES, 

they should procure WPA2 components with FIPS-validated cryptographic modules. WPA equipment is 

not FIPS-compliant because it utilizes the RC4 algorithm instead of AES. Products can obtain WPA2 

certification without being FIPS-validated, so Federal agencies should check for both WPA2 certification 

and FIPS validation. 

7.3.3 

 

Modes of Operation 

Both WPA and WPA2 have two modes of operation: Personal and Enterprise. The Personal mode 

involves the use of a pre-shared key for authentication, while the Enterprise mode uses IEEE 802.1X and 

EAP for this purpose. Products can be certified for both modes or for Personal mode only. Therefore, 

organizations that plan to use an authentication server rather than pre-shared keys should look specifically 

for the Enterprise certification. The use of an authentication server rather than pre-shared keys is 

recommended for most situations because of the impracticality of generating, deploying, and periodically 

replacing pre-shared keys. The lack of individual user/client authentication in most PSK APs is another 

reason to avoid the use of pre-shared keys. 

7.4 Summary 

Federal agencies are required to use FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms that are contained in FIPSvalidated cryptographic modules. In addition, the Wi-Fi Alliance has established several certification 

95 WPA2 products implement both WPA and WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) TKIP and 4-Way Handshakes. 

7-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

programs to give consumers of WLAN products assurance that their systems comply with IEEE 802.11 

specifications and can interoperate with similar equipment from other vendors. The following 

certifications have been created to test interoperability of IEEE 802.11i implementations: 

 WPA, which addresses a subset of the IEEE 802.11i specification that addresses the weaknesses 

of WEP 

 WPA2, which extends WPA to include the full set of IEEE 802.11i requirements. 

Federal agencies should procure WPA2 products that have been FIPS-validated; WPA products cannot be 

FIPS-validated because they do not support FIPS-approved encryption algorithms. WPA and WPA2 

have both Personal and Enterprise modes of operation. Organizations that plan to deploy authentication 

servers as part of an IEEE 802.1X and EAP implementation should procure products with the Enterprise 

level certification; government organizations should also require FIPS conformance or NIST approval. 

7-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

7-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

8. WLAN Security Best Practices 

As explained in the previous sections, IEEE 802.11 RSNs are complex, involving multiple devices, 

protocols, and standards. This section distills this complexity into a manageable and actionable set of 

recommendations that organizations can implement to provide reasonable assurance that they are 

protected against most WLAN security threats. The recommendations should be particularly helpful to 

organizations that have made a decision to integrate WLAN technology into their computer networks and 

want to determine the best way to do it. The recommendations should also be helpful to organizations 

that are already managing WLANs, but are not satisfied with the level of security they provide; they 

might want to upgrade, replace, and configure their infrastructure so that it is capable of supporting RSNs 

and other security controls. 

To be effective, WLAN security should be incorporated throughout the entire life cycle of WLAN 

solutions, involving everything from policy to operations. This section references a five-phase life cycle 

model to help organizations determine at what point in their WLAN deployments a recommended best 

practice might be relevant. The model is based on one introduced in NIST SP 800-64, Security 

Considerations in the Information System Development Life Cycle. 96 Organizations may follow a project 

management methodology or life cycle model that does not directly map to the phases in the model 

presented here, but the types of tasks in the methodology and their sequencing are probably similar. The 

phases of the life cycle are as follows: 

 Phase 1: Initiation. This phase includes the tasks that an organization should perform before it 

starts to design its WLAN solution. These include providing an overall vision for how the 

WLAN would support the mission of the organization, creating a high-level strategy for the 

WLAN’s implementation, developing a WLAN use policy, and specifying business and 

functional requirements for the solution. 

 Phase 2: Acquisition/Development. For the purposes of this guide, the 

Acquisition/Development phase is split into the following two phases: 

– Phase 2a: Planning and Design. In this phase, WLAN network architects specify the 

technical characteristics of the WLAN solution and related network components. These 

characteristics include the EAP method or methods used to support authentication; the 

protocols used to support communication between AP and AS; access control lists and 

firewall rules to segregate WLAN traffic; and the nature of the supporting PKI. The types of 

clients to be deployed also need to be considered, since they can affect the desired security 

policies. There is a wide variety of supplicants that may or may not support desired EAP 

methods; care must be taken to ensure that the security policy can be employed and enforced 

by all components (client, AP, and AS). A site survey is typically conducted to help 

determine the number and placement of access points, as well as how they integrate into the 

existing network. 

– Phase 2b: Procurement. This phase involves specifying the number and type of WLAN 

components that must be purchased, the feature sets they must support, and any certifications 

they must hold. 

 Phase 3: Implementation. In this phase, procured equipment is first configured to meet 

operational and security requirements, and then installed and activated on a production network. 

Implementation includes altering the configuration of other security controls and technologies, 

such as security event logging, network management, AAA server integration, and PKI. 

 

96 This document is available at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-64/NIST-SP800-64.pdf. 

8-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

8-2

 

 Phase 4: Operations/Maintenance. This phase includes security-related tasks that an 

organization should perform on an ongoing basis once the WLAN is operational, including log 

review and rogue AP detection. 

 Phase 5: Disposition. This phase encompasses tasks that occur after a system or its components 

have been retired, including preserving information to meet legal requirements, sanitizing media, 

and disposing of equipment properly. 

The recommendations presented in this section are provided in tables corresponding to the life cycle 

phases. Each recommendation is accompanied by a brief explanation of the rationale for its inclusion, 

and is rated as “best practice” or “should consider”. Organizations are strongly encouraged to adopt the 

“best practice” recommendations. Failure to implement them significantly increases the risk of a WLAN 

security failure. Organizations should also examine each of the “should consider” recommendations to 

determine their applicability to the target environment. In general, “should consider” recommendations 

enhance security beyond what can be achieved through the “best practice” recommendations. A “should 

consider” recommendation should be rejected only if it is infeasible or the reduction in risk from its 

implementation does not justify its cost. 

Organizations should develop their WLAN security controls based not only on the recommendations in 

the tables, but also using other guidance on security controls. FIPS Publication (PUB) 199 establishes 

three security categories—low, moderate, and high—based on the potential impact of a security breach 

involving a particular system.97 NIST SP 800-53 provides recommendations for minimum management, 

operational, and technical security controls for information systems based on the FIPS PUB 199 impact 

categories.98 The recommendations in NIST SP 800-53 should be helpful to organizations in identifying 

controls that are needed to protect networks and systems, which should be used in addition to the specific 

recommendations for WLANs listed in this document. 

Some large organizations divide their IT duties among various teams. For example, one group may be 

responsible for desktop and laptop support, while another might focus on the network infrastructure. In 

these organizations, implementation of a WLAN may require participation from multiple IT support 

teams. To assist with this division of labor, the tables identify the impacted WLAN components (i.e., 

STA, AP, AS, DS) for each of the listed recommendations. When the DS is listed, it refers to the 

switches, routers, and network media of the organization’s enterprise network behind each AP. In most 

cases, these are part of a wired network. 

The tables can also serve as checklists; the status column on the right is blank so that IT staff can use it to 

measure progress toward implementation of the recommendations. 

97 FIPS PUB 199, Standards for Security Categorization of Federal Information and Information Systems, is available at 

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips199/FIPS-PUB-199-final.pdf. 98 NIST SP 800-53 Revision 1, Recommended Security Controls for Federal Information Systems, is available at 

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-53-Rev1/800-53-rev1-final-clean-sz.pdf. 
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Table 8-1. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Initiation Phase 

Initiation Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic1 

Perform a risk assessment to understand WLAN threats, the likelihood that those threats will be realized, and the potential impact of realized threats on the value of the organization’s assets.99

The risk assessment is an important input to the development of the WLAN usage policy because it identifies which WLAN activities pose an acceptable risk to the organization’s information resources and which do not. 

ALL 3

2 

Establish a WLAN usage policy that specifies which user communities are authorized to use WLAN technology and for what purposes. 

A WLAN usage policy is the foundation on which subsequent security controls are based. It should be defined and enforced by WLAN trained staff or consultants. The policy should explicitly identify if WLANs are available to business partners, customers, and other guests. It should also identify the information resources that shall and shall not be available to WLAN users (e.g., allow a guest to use the organization’s Internet connection but not access its internal database servers). Finally, the policy should describe the terms under which an organization’s WLANcapable mobile devices (e.g., laptops) can be used on external WLANs (e.g., home, hotel, coffee shop). 

STA / AP/AS 3

3 

Require that all connections to an organization’s WLANs be based on an IEEE 802.11i RSNA using IEEE 802.1X/EAP authentication. 

Sections 3 and 4 detail the reasons why RSN associations are superior to pre-RSN authentication techniques. The RSNAs should be based on IEEE 802.1X/EAP authentication rather than pre-shared keys. Also, the RSNAs should use CCMP leveraging a FIPS-validated AES encryption module. Organizations may relax this requirement for public-use WLANs if they disclose that those WLANs provide no security for wireless connections; if so, they may require a captive portal (“splash page”) system to provide users with relevant legal disclosures and disclaimers. 

STA 3 

99 For more information on performing risk assessments, read NIST SP 800-30, Risk Management Guide for Information Technology Systems. All 

download from http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-30/sp800-30.pdf. 

8-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Initiation Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

4 

Establish or enhance operating system and application security configuration standards for laptops and other potential STAs to account for WLAN risks.100

WLAN-capable devices typically are at greater risk of a security breach than wired-only devices and may require additional security controls beyond those already present. The configuration standard should require personal firewall and anti-virus software for all STA platforms for which such security products are commercially available. Remote connectivity to the devices (e.g., file sharing, open network ports) should be limited where feasible. 

STA 3 

5 

Establish or enhance operating system and application security configuration standards for the AS. 

The ASs should be among the most secure servers in the enterprise because a breach of an AS could allow an adversary to access the network without a physical connection, perhaps even beyond the organization’s physical perimeter. Special emphasis should be placed on preventing exposure of cryptographic keys to unauthorized parties. 

AS 3 

6 

Require that administration and network management of WLAN infrastructure equipment (i.e., APs and ASs) involve strong authentication and encryption of all communication. 

IEEE 802.11i does not specify any requirements related to the management and administrative interfaces of WLAN equipment, so it cannot be assumed that these interfaces are secure. If an organization uses Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to manage its equipment, it should use SNMPv3,101 which has enhanced security 

features relative to its predecessors. Web-based administration should use SSL/TLS or an equivalent protection (e.g., IPsec).102 Secure shell (ssh) and secure ftp (sftp) can be used for command-line access and file uploads. 

AP / AS 3

100 NIST has a repository of security configuration checklists for various operating systems and applications, which is located at http://checklists.nist

helpful to organizations in securing STAs, ASs, and other RSN components. NIST SP 800-70, Security Configuration Checklists Program for IT 

checklist program in more detail. 

101 For more information on SNMPv3, see http://www.snmp.com/snmpv3/, which provides links to pertinent RFCs, trade press articles, white papers102 More information on TLS is available from NIST SP 800-52, Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Transport Layer Security (TLS) Implementa

resource is NIST SP 800-77, Guide to IPsec VPNs, which compares IPsec, TLS, and other methods for protecting network traffic. 

8-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Initiation Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

7 

Educate users about the risks of WLAN technology and how to mitigate those risks. 

Security awareness and training helps users to establish good security practices to prevent inadvertent or malicious intrusions into an organization’s information systems. WLAN security content should be integrated into existing security awareness programs when feasible.103

ALL 3

8 

If applicable, develop or revise the organization’s PKI certificate policy, certification practice statement, and related processes to support the WLAN solution. 

The certificate policy and certification practice statement are the foundation of PKI security. An IEEE 802.11i RSN can leverage a PKI if it uses IEEE 802.1X port-based access control with an EAP method based on public key cryptography, which is expected to be the case in nearly all large enterprises that deploy RSNs. A PKI may also be used to support IPsec connections that supplement the RSN solution (e.g., for securing communication between AP and AS, which is not required in WLAN standards). This recommendation is not applicable in environments without a PKI and may not be applicable in environments that use the PKI services of a third party.104

STA / AS 3

9 Require two-factor authentication for WLAN connectivity.105

Two-factor authentication enhances the strength of the authentication procedure, making it less likely that adversaries will successfully exploit it. Two-factor authentication could include use of biometrics or smart cards, which could significantly increase the cost of the WLAN solution. Organizations should weigh the costs and benefits of any proposed authentication solution. For users, devices whose credentials cannot be re-used require reauthentication when roaming from one AP to another; this makes this approach cumbersome and potentially unusable. In cases in which two-factor authentication is determined to be unnecessary for users, it should still be considered for administrative connections to WLAN infrastructure. 

STA / AS 

103 NIST SP 800-50, Building an Information Technology Security Awareness and Training Program, contains detailed guidance on designing, deve

monitoring an IT security awareness and training program. 

104 More information on PKI is available from NIST SP 800-32, Introduction to Public Key Technology and the Federal PKI Infrastructure. 105 For more guidance on authentication, see NIST SP 800-63, Electronic Authentication Guideline. 

8-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Initiation Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

10 

Establish requirements for a WLAN intrusion detection system.106

Intrusion detection systems deployed on the wireless network can detect and respond to potential malicious activities, including unauthorized WLAN vulnerability scanning and the installation of rogue APs. The results of the risk assessment should help determine the level (if any) of intrusion detection required. 

STA / AP / DS 3

11 

Use the services of security professionals to assist with WLAN security issues if the requisite skill sets are not currently available in the organization. 

Wireless security is a complex field. Even small flaws in implementation can have significant ramifications for the resulting security of the WLAN solution. Well-trained professionals can help mitigate this risk. 

ALL 

106 Section 3.5.3.1.5 of NIST SP 800-48, Wireless Network Security: 802.11, Bluetooth and Handheld Devices, provides information on wireless intr

discusses the shortcomings of using intrusion detection systems intended for wired environments in wireless applications. Also, NIST SP 800-94

Detection and Prevention Systems, provides information on wireless intrusion detection and prevention systems. 

8-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Table 8-2. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Planning and Design Phase 

Planning and Design Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

12 

Conduct a site survey to determine the proper location of APs, given a desired coverage area. 

The site survey should result in a report that proposes the location for each AP, graphically notes its usable coverage area, and assigns it an IEEE 802.11 radio channel.107 The 

estimated usable range of each AP should not extend beyond the physical boundaries of the facility whenever possible. To best achieve this result, APs should be located near the center of rooms and away from exterior walls and windows. In addition, APs should be located in areas that can be physically secured to prevent unauthorized tampering.108 Configuring APs to only accept connections 

at higher data rates helps limit the effective coverage area as well. 

AP 

13 

Create a dedicated Virtual LAN (VLAN)109 to support AP 

connections to the distribution system (e.g., enterprise wired network). 

Using dedicated VLANs to support wireless connections to the enterprise network segregates wireless traffic from other network communications. Dedicated VLANs facilitate the use of network access control lists, which identify the protocols and services that are allowed to pass from WLANs to the DS. Different VLANs can be defined within the wireless connections to further separate varying security policies. 

AP / DS 

107 The nature of electromagnetic radiation is such that determining the precise boundaries of a WLAN is not feasible. Nevertheless, an organization 

usable coverage ranges based on empirical tests with typical STAs and APs. 

108 The core risk associated with lack of AP physical security is that someone might be able to reset the AP to manufacturer defaults, which could di

Exactly what needs to be physically secured depends on the characteristics of the AP technology. When discussing the concept of an AP, this dosecurity and radio functionality are integrated in the same device. In most cases, particularly home and small office applications, this is true. Ho

offerings, a WLAN switch supports the IEEE 802.11i RSN AP security functions of session keys generation, TKIP or CCMP encapsulation and dthrough communication between the STA and AS. This switch connects to multiple radio devices, each of which has an antenna and proprietary 

communication with the switch. In an IEEE 802.11i RSN, the device requiring physical security is the one that performs the AP security function

performed on a WLAN switch, that switch should be in a locked communications closet, server room, or data center. When those functions are c

the radio should be physically secured. In many cases, the radios often are placed on conference tables, above ceiling tiles, or in other areas that 

cases, the radio should be placed in a locked box with holes that allow for protruding antennas. 

109 A VLAN is a logical group of STAs that communicate as if they were on the same physical LAN, even though they might be on different ones. V

the configuration of one or more switches across an enterprise. 

8-7
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Planning and Design Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

14 

Ensure that network management information between APs/ASs and network management servers or consoles is transmitted over a dedicated management VLAN. 

This control is applicable only in cases in which APs or ASs can support a dedicated management interface. A dedicated management VLAN can be used to transfer preshared keys, execute management commands, and transmit audit data without the risk that non-administrative users can eavesdrop on that communication. Segregating this type of traffic is often referred as out of band communication because it occurs over a separate channel than those that support data traffic. Out of band channels are particularly useful during denial of service attacks, when severe congestion on data channels may prevent administrators from implementing corrective security measures if those data channels are the only ones available to them. This sensitive VLAN traffic should be protected. 

AP / AS 

15 

If a WLAN will be supporting unauthenticated users, such as members of the public, install a network firewall between each WLAN and its distribution system.110

A firewall can enforce a security policy on the information flow between the WLAN and its distribution network, allowing only authorized protocols and services to traverse this boundary. Firewalls are necessary if access to the WLAN is extended to users who are not positively identified by 802.11i, such as members of the general public. 

AP / AS / DS 

16 Install a personal firewall on each mobile device. 

A personal firewall can enforce a security policy on the information flow between the STA and other parties, allowing only authorized protocols and services to access the STA. This can prevent direct attacks on the STA before the completion of the 4-Way Handshake; it can also prevent attacks from other clients attached to the same AP after the completion of the 4-Way Handshake. 

STA 3

110 Guidance on network firewalls is available from NIST SP 800-41, Guidelines on Firewalls and Firewall Policy. 

8-8
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Planning and Design Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

17 

Develop wireless security audit processes and procedures that identify the types of security relevant events that should be captured, and determine how audit records will be securely stored for subsequent analysis. 

Developing a program of audit processes and procedures will help ensure that the organization can detect unauthorized behavior and security breaches on wireless systems. Both APs and ASs should send event data to a secure audit server in real time so that the integrity of previously captured audit data is protected even when the AP or AS is compromised. Events to be captured should include, at a minimum, both successful and unsuccessful authentication and association attempts. 

AP / AS 3

18 

Select an appropriate EAP method or EAP method sequence for WLAN authentication, and design any necessary integration with PKI technology. 

EAP method selection is the cornerstone of RSN security protections; a poor EAP implementation can undermine nearly all aspects of RSN security. Appropriate EAP methods are those that meet the required security claims listed in Section 5.1.2. They usually will include one or more of the TLS-based methods (e.g., EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP) because TLS is the preferred method for distributing key material. If the TLS method uses an inner application or method, these should also be identified at this time. All TLS methods require at least some integration with a PKI, even if certificates are required on ASs only. Careful planning of the authentication methods and supporting infrastructure ensures that RSNAs will comply with the organization’s security policy and objectives. 

STA / AS 3

19 Determine the fallback strategy when WLAN authentication fails. 

Authorized users sometimes fail to successfully authenticate 

to the WLAN, even though they have a valid business reason to use the network. Reasons include forgotten passwords and lost smart cards. There should be a fallback strategy to provide access to these users. In some cases, this might involve a human process such as a call to the help desk to reset a password. In other cases, it might involve a technical process, such as providing users the ability to enter a pass phrase when they are using a STA that does not hold a personal certificate. In either situation, the fallback method should be at least as strong as the primary method, otherwise attackers will attempt to exploit the weaker fallback approach. 

AS 3

8-9
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Planning and Design Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

20 

Deploy wireless intrusion detection systems to detect suspicious or unauthorized activity. 

Intrusion detection systems enable the organization’s operations or security staff to identify and respond to attacks on the organization’s systems or information resources before they inflict the maximum potential damage. The radio coverage of wireless intrusion detection devices should be at least as great as that of the WLANs they are intended to protect. If the coverage area of the intrusion detection system were smaller than the coverage area of the WLAN, then attackers could position themselves to circumvent the intrusion detection system. 

STA / AP 3

Table 8-3. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Procurement Phase 

Procurement Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

21 Procure WPA2-Enterprise certified STA and AP products only.111 Only WPA2-Enterprise certified products are capable of fully implementing the IEEE 802.11i RSN protections, including CCMP support and IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. STA / AP 3 22 

Procure products that use FIPSvalidated cryptographic modules and deploy them in “FIPS mode” if required.112

Federal agencies are required to use FIPS-validated cryptographic modules. Cryptographic modules that are not FIPS-validated cannot be assured of providing the level of cryptographic protection intended through use of RSN technology. When reviewing the list of a vendor’s FIPSvalidated products, organizations should check that the validation is for the algorithms that will be deployed in the organization’s RSN (e.g., CCMP). 

STA / AP 3 

111 For a listing of WPA2-Enterprise and other Wi-Fi Alliance certified WLAN systems, visit https://certifications.wi-fi.org/wbcs_certified_products112 For a listing of FIPS-validated cryptographic modules, visit http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/. 

8-10
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Procurement Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

23 

Procure STAs and APs that support NIST AES key wrap with 128-bit HMAC-SHA-1 to protect transient keys during the 4-Way and Group Key Handshakes. 

AES provides assurance of key confidentiality, while HMACSHA-1 provides assurance of key integrity. Protecting the PTK and GTK during transit is critical to protecting the communications that rely on those keys for data confidentiality and integrity. The alternative algorithm permitted by IEEE 802.11i for the 4-Way and Group Key Handshakes is RC4 encryption (for confidentiality) with HMAC-MD5 (for integrity), but RC4 has known vulnerabilities, and neither algorithm is FIPS-validated. 

STA / AP 3 

24 Procure ASs and APs that communicate in a secure manner. The communication link between the AS and AP should be secured. The MSK distribution from AS to AP should use appropriate key wrap mechanisms. AS/AP 3 25 

Procure products that support the organization’s chosen EAP methods. 

If the organization invests in products that do not support the chosen EAP methods, then either the equipment cannot be used (resulting in wasted expenditure) or pressure may exist to modify the organization’s security configuration to support alternative methods, which might weaken the network security. Both STAs and ASs must support the chosen EAP methods. Organizations should test EAP interoperability between STAs and ASs before final procurement. 

STA / AS 3 

26 

Procure APs that terminate associations after a configurable time period. 

IEEE 802.11i does not specify the length of time for which an RSN association is valid, potentially allowing WLAN sessions to remain open indefinitely. A session termination feature in the AP would cause STAs to reauthenticate if network access is still needed after a fixed period of idleness or connectivity. While not required by the standard, this functionality mitigates the risk that an adversary could use active RSN associations for unauthorized purposes for an indefinite period of time. 

AP 3 

8-11
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Procurement Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

27 

Procure ASs that grant authorizations for a configurable time period. 

IEEE 802.11i does not specify the length of time for which an RSN association is valid, potentially allowing WLAN sessions to remain open indefinitely. A session termination feature in the AS would cause STAs to reauthenticate if network access is still needed after a fixed period of idleness or connectivity. While not required by the standard, this functionality mitigates the risk that an adversary could use active RSN associations for unauthorized purposes for an indefinite period of time. 

AS 

28 

Procure APs that log security relevant events and forward them to a remote audit server in real time113. 

Audit technology helps ensure that the organization can detect unauthorized behavior and take actions to prevent or limit the extent of a security breach. IEEE 802.11i does not require a logging capability, so organizations must seek this functionality outside the standards framework. The AP should support the functional audit requirements developed during the planning and design phase. The AP should have a feature to forward events automatically to a central audit server. 

AP 3 

29 

Procure APs that can support an independent management interface to the distribution system (e.g., wired network). 

Support for an independent management interface enables organizations to establish an out of band channel for key transfer and other administrative functions. 

AP 

30 

Procure APs that support SNMPv3 if the organization plans SNMPbased AP management. SNMPv3 has enhanced security features relative to its predecessors. AP 

31 

Procure APs that support authentication and data encryption for administrative sessions. 

IEEE 802.11i does not specify security for administrative connections to APs, potentially allowing unauthorized management of these devices if not properly secured. Examples of protections include SSL/TLS support for Webbased administration and secure shell (SSH) for commandline administration. AP 3

113 More information on log management is available from NIST SP 800-92, Guide to Computer Security Log Management. 

8-12
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Procurement Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

32 

When the WLAN solution involves TLS-based EAP methods, procure STAs whose software can be configured to specify valid ASs by name. 

If a STA does not specify the valid servers with which it can authenticate, a potential exists for an adversary to insert a bogus AS into the WLAN infrastructure as part of a man-inthe-middle attack. STA 3

33 

Procure APs and ASs that can support IPsec or alternative security methods to establish a mutually authenticated secure communications channel between AP and AS.114

IEEE 802.11i and its related standards (IEEE 802.1X, EAP, etc.) assume a preexisting trust relationship between the AP and AS and further assume that the communication between them is secure. If organizations do not implement technology to realize these characteristics, then the assumptions are invalid and RSN security could be compromised. IPsec is the most common means of establishing a secure communications channel between two devices, but equivalent protection can be provided with link layer security controls and other protocols designed to ensure the confidentiality and integrity of network communications.115

AP / AS 3 

34 Procure APs and ASs that support Network Time Protocol (NTP). 

NTP allows distributed devices to synchronize timestamps, which is critical to effective log analysis because it allows audit personnel to establish accurate event sequences across multiple devices. In addition, IEEE 802.11i suggests that the nonce in the 4-Way Handshake should be based on NTP time whenever possible. If not, the cryptographic properties of the 4-Way Handshake could be weakened in some circumstances. 

AP / AS 

35 

Procure an auditing tool to automate the review of AP and AS audit data. 

Audit tools often are more effective than humans at distilling relevant information from multiple sources. In large enterprise WLAN deployments, reviewing the amount of data generated could overwhelm technical support staff if they do not have appropriate tools to assist them with this task. 

AP / AS / DS 3 

114 More information on key management is available from NIST SP 800-77, Guide to IPsec VPNs. 115 Potential options include Secure Shell (SSH) and TLS. 

8-13
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Procurement Phase 

Impacted # Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Components Best 

Practic

36 

Procure products that can be upgraded easily in software or firmware. 

WLAN products require this support so that they can take advantage of wireless security patches and enhancements released after original delivery. Not all APs support this feature, so this functionality should be verified before procurement. 

ALL 3 

Table 8-4. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Implementation Phase 

Implementation Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

37 Ensure that all APs have strong, unique administrative passwords. 

To protect against dictionary attacks, administrator passwords on APs should be hard to guess. In addition, organizations should not use a common password for multiple APs. Otherwise, a compromised password on one AP could have much wider consequences. 

AP 3 

38 

Disable all insecure and unused management protocols on the APs, and configure remaining management protocols for least privilege. 

Disabling all insecure and nonessential management protocols eliminates potential methods that an adversary can use when attempting to compromise an AP. Examples of insecure management protocols include SNMPv1 and SNMPv2. If SNMPv3 is used, configure it for least privilege (i.e., read only) unless write access is required (e.g., to change configuration settings as part of an automated incident response procedure). 

AP 3

39 Disable WEP and TKIP in the configuration of each AP. 

If WEP remains enabled, then STAs might be able to negotiate WEP for authentication and encapsulation, which would negate RSN protections. Similarly, if an organization’s security policy requires CCMP, but TKIP remains enabled, then STAs might negotiate TKIP instead of CCMP.116

AP 3

116 IEEE 802.11i allows for RSNs based on data confidentiality and integrity protocols other than TKIP and CCMP, including vendor proprietary alg

the 4-Way Handshake for authentication and key distribution. These vendor proprietary solutions could have easily exploitable vulnerabilities, wdisable unused protocols. 

8-14
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Implementation Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

40 Activate logging and direct log entries to a remote audit server. 

Logs enable security and support staff to identify potential security issues and respond accordingly. Using a remote central logging server facilitates reviews of logs across the enterprise and ensures the integrity of log data when the AP or AS is compromised. 

AP / AS 3

41 

Establish an IPsec connection (or equivalent protection mechanism) between each AP and its associated AS or ASs. 

The standards assume that the AP and AS have a preexisting trust relationship but never specify how that relationship is established. A mutual authenticated secure connection between AP and AS must exist to prevent an adversary with access to the distribution system from impersonating the AS or eavesdropping on the transfer of key material among other potential attacks. Exploits of this nature could greatly undermine the efficacy of RSN protections. 

AP / AS 

42 

Configure a maximum GMK lifetime on the AP, preferably not to exceed 24 hours. 

The GMK is used to protect multicast traffic. Setting a maximum GMK lifetime reduces the exposure of data if the GMK is ever compromised. 

AP 3 

43 

Configure a maximum PMK lifetime on the AS, preferably not to exceed eight hours.117

In the IEEE 802.11i RSN framework, the PMK is used to derive all other encryption keys used to secure various types of WLAN communication. Setting a maximum lifetime for the PMK reduces the probability that an adversary can compromise it. 

AS 3 

44 Configure the STA and AS to use authorized EAP methods only. 

If both the STA and AS allow EAP methods other than those permitted in the security architecture, then a potential exists that the STA and AS will use the unauthorized method in a manner that circumvents the organization’s security policy. 

STA / AS 3

45 

When TLS methods are used, ensure that the STAs connect to valid ASs only. 

If a STA connects to an unauthorized AS, that AS will be able to capture authentication credentials and severely compromise network security. To ensure authorized connections, the STA should be configured to specify the names of valid ASs, specify the locally stored CA certificate used to validate the digital signature of the AS certificate, and require that the STA check for AS certificate revocation. 

STA 3

117 Some organizations may operate mission-critical applications that require real-time responsiveness, and therefore cannot tolerate even small delay

or reauthentication transactions. In this relatively rare situation, organizations may wish not to set a PMK lifetime, effectively making it infinite, during scheduled maintenance downtime. 

8-15
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Implementation Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

46 

Disable ad hoc mode on each STA unless a business requirement exists for peer-to-peer wireless networking. 

Most organizations that deploy WLANs use infrastructure mode only, in which STAs connect to an enterprise network through APs. Attackers can use ad hoc mode to gain access to a computer’s information resources with little effort, particularly when the STA is configured improperly (e.g., default settings have not been changed). The wireless IDS should monitor the use of ad hoc mode on the wireless network. Organizations that require ad hoc mode should develop and apply a standard configuration to each STA and develop procedures for implementing and replacing preshared keys. 

STA 3

Table 8-5. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Operations/Maintenance Phase 

Operations/Maintenance Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

47 

Test and deploy software patches and upgrades on a regular basis.118

Newly discovered security vulnerabilities of vendor products should be patched to prevent inadvertent and malicious exploits. Patches should also be tested before implementation to ensure that they work properly. 

ALL 3

48 Ensure that all passwords are changed regularly. 

Passwords should be changed regularly to reduce the risk of a compromised password being misused; it may be possible to configure the user management system to enforce password updates. 

ALL 3

49 Review audit logs frequently. 

Frequent reviews of audit logs allow security and support personnel to identify security issues and take corrective or preventative measures quickly. All components of the WLAN solution should generate event logs, especially the AP and AS. Automated logging tools can assist with log review and send real-time alerts in response to critical events. Events to track include failed authentication attempts and MIC failures. 

AP / AS / DS 

(STA optional) 3

118 More information on patching is available from NIST SP 800-40 version 2, Creating a Patch and Vulnerability Management Program. 

8-16
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Operations/Maintenance Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

50 Inventory APs. 

A complete inventory of an organization’s authorized APs is the basis for identifying rogue APs during security audits and can be helpful for a variety of support tasks. 

AP 3 

51 Inventory STAs. 

STAs have the potential to provide an adversary with an entry point into the enterprise network, particularly if a user has activated ad hoc mode, which allows peer-to-peer connections from other STAs. Understanding where STAs are located and how they are used can assist with risk assessments, audits, and other support tasks. Taking an inventory of STAs is most practical in organizations that already have mature asset management systems. 

STA 3 

52 

Perform comprehensive WLAN security assessments at regular and random intervals. 

Security assessments, or audits, are an essential tool for checking the security posture of a WLAN and identifying corrective actions necessary to maintain acceptable levels of security. WLAN security assessments should include radio detection of rogue APs; verification of STA, AP and AS configuration settings; and review of audit logs. 

AP / AS 3

53 

Re-apply the organization’s security configuration standard to an AP whenever its reset function is used. 

Security settings typically are returned to factory defaults after a reset event, which usually occurs when an AP experiences an operational failure. Appropriate personnel need to restore the standard security configuration to ensure that RSN protections are maintained whenever a reset occurs. 

AP 3 

54 

If an organization uses PSKs to establish RSN associations, replace them frequently, preferably at least every 30 days. 

Most organizations do not require PSKs, relying instead on the alternative key management techniques integrated with various EAP methods. Organizations that distribute preshared keys, either manually or through proprietary automated solutions, need to replace the keys periodically to reduce the risk that they will be compromised.119

STA / AP 3 

55 

If PSKs are used to establish RSN associations, ensure that no key is shared across multiple STAs. 

Ensuring the uniqueness of each PSK limits the impact of a key compromise on communications between the STA and AP that hold the key. If any STA/AP combination shares a PSK with another STA/AP combination, a STA or AP in one pair could compromise the communication of the other pair. 

STA / AP 

119 More information on key management is available from NIST SP 800-57, Recommendation on Key Management. 

8-17
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Operations/Maintenance Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

56 Periodically update the certificates on the clients and the servers. This is especially important on client devices, which must have accurate root and intermediate CA certificates loaded locally in order to be able to authenticate the AS correctly. STA / AP 57 

Designate an individual or group to track WLAN product vulnerabilities and wireless security trends. 

Assigning responsibility to an individual for tracking wireless security issues helps ensure continued secure implementation of the organization’s WLANs. 

ALL 3 

Table 8-6. IEEE 802.11 RSN Security Checklist: Disposition Phase 

Disposition Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

57 

When disposing of a WLAN component, remove all sensitive configuration information, including pre-shared keys and passwords. 

Adversaries can use sensitive information on discarded devices to conduct subsequent attacks on the organization’s networks. Organizations should use degauss devices when feasible.120 Disk wiping utilities can be used for devices that 

have hard disks. Another option is to clear configuration settings manually using the management interface. 

ALL 3

120 Degaussing is a technique in which a powerful magnetic field is applied to an electronic storage device to erase permanently any stored data. 

8-18
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORK

Disposition Phase 

# Security Recommendation Rationale / Discussion Impacted Components Best Practic

58 

When disposing of a WLAN component, ensure that its audit records are retained as needed to meet legal or other requirements. 

Information contained in the audit records may be needed even after the WLAN component is discarded (e.g., for an investigation of a subsequently discovered security breach). Organizations should identify the legal requirements to retain records that apply to their operations.121 When log 

events are forwarded to a central audit server, as is recommended, regular backup of the server facilitates the retention of records. When a log server does not exist, the disposal process needs to include capturing the existing log data and storing it on alternative media, such as CD-ROM or tape. 

ALL 3 

121 An example of a requirements document is General Records Schedule (GRS) 24, Information Technology Operations and Management Records. 

the National Archives and Records Administration at http://www.archives.gov/records-mgmt/ardor/grs24.html. 

8-19
STABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

8-20

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

E
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

9. Case Studies 

This section presents three case studies to illustrate how various issues discussed in Sections 3 through 8 

might be addressed in practice. Although the case studies are hypothetical, they are intended to resemble 

real-world problems and solutions. They do not cover all the aspects of system engineering or all the 

technical implementation details that an organization should consider when implementing an IEEE 

802.11 RSN; they provide a representative sample of the issues an organization may face. The case 

studies are as follows: 

 Case Study 1: First Time WLAN Deployment. This case study presents the scenario of an 

organization that planned to deploy a WLAN for the first time. With no existing WLAN 

infrastructure to replace or update, the organization methodically applied the best practices introduced 

in this guide. 

 Case Study 2: Transitioning an Existing WLAN Infrastructure to RSN Technology. This case 

study discusses an organization that had implemented WLAN technology already but later wanted to 

migrate to a RSN framework. Having just experienced a major WLAN security breach, the 

organization felt that it must act quickly. To meet its needs, the organization developed and 

implemented first an interim WLAN solution, and then a long-term one. 

 Case Study 3: Supporting Users Who Are Not Employees. This case study presents the scenario 

of an organization that planned a future WLAN deployment, whose WLAN user population will 

consist of many people who are not employees, or perhaps may not have any prior relationship with 

the organization. It created a security architecture that allows for access from a very diverse set of 

users. Supporting these users might not require an IEEE 802.11 RSN. 

In each case study, the organization followed the information system development life cycle introduced in 

NIST SP 800-64, Security Considerations in the Information System Development Life Cycle, and the best 

practices discussed in Section 8. 

9.1 Case Study 1: First Time WLAN Deployment 

For several months, many of agency XYZ’s employees had requested the ability to read e-mail and access 

Web sites when they were in the agency’s conference rooms. Several technically inclined users had 

suggested that a WLAN solution could provide this functionality more effectively than wired 

connectivity. The agency’s IT group initially resisted implementation of WLAN technology, citing 

security concerns such as the vulnerabilities of WEP. These concerns were allayed substantially with the 

final release of IEEE 802.11i and its RSN framework. Additionally, the IT group knew they could now 

identify interoperable IEEE 802.11i-compliant products through the Wi-Fi Alliance’s WPA2-Enterprise 

product certification program. Given these developments, the agency’s CIO commissioned an enterprise 

WLAN deployment project in conjunction with other agency executives. The agency used the NIST SP 

800-64 information system development life cycle model to guide the project, but excluded the 

disposition phase because it would not occur until some time after the project had been completed. 

9.1.1 Phase 1: Initiation 

The first step in the project plan was to conduct a risk assessment that identified agency information 

assets and the threats a new WLAN could pose to those assets. The assessment’s conclusion was that the 

mission of the agency could be significantly impacted if external users were able to access the agency’s 

internal network, and that a WLAN solution would need to provide reasonable protection against such 

threats. 

9-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

The second step in the project plan was to bring together the major stakeholders to draft a WLAN use 

policy and gather functional requirements for the WLAN solution. The stakeholder advisory panel agreed 

that the WLAN would be for the use of employees and full-time on-site contractors only; other users 

should be prevented from using the WLAN through the implementation of user authentication and 

authorization technology. The panel also wanted users to be able to roam to any conference room in the 

building without having to reconfigure their laptops or other wireless devices. Finally, the panel 

requested that users be able to access all information resources available from their wired desktops, 

including Internet access. The WLAN use policy also specified who is authorized to install APs (e.g. not 

end users), as well as which techniques would be used to detect and handle rogue APs. 

An attorney on the panel noted that the agency’s memorandum of understanding (MOU) with several 

state governments explicitly prohibited the agency from using wireless networks to access sensitive 

information that the state governments enter into a database system that the agency calls StateConnect. A 

network engineer from the IT group had argued that this limitation was unnecessary because RSN 

protections offered a better defense against eavesdropping and data modification than the agency’s wired 

networks. Nevertheless, the panel eventually agreed that the MOUs would need to be honored regardless 

of the assurance an RSN could provide. The solution would have to include technical controls to prevent 

WLAN users from accessing any portion of the StateConnect database system. However, the panel 

agreed that MOUs should be updated in the next revision cycle to account for advances in WLAN 

security. 

9.1.2 Phase 2: Acquisition/Development 

With the WLAN use policy and a solid set of functional requirements in place, the IT staff started the 

acquisition/development phase of the project. The first step was a site survey to help determine the 

network architecture of the WLAN solution. All 20 conference rooms were located in the center of the 

building, which meant the risk of radio emanations beyond the property’s perimeter was unlikely. 

Testing established that installing one AP in each conference room would provide adequate coverage for 

all except the two large conference rooms on the ground floor, which would require three APs to provide 

adequate connectivity. Testing also confirmed that WLAN emissions would be contained within the 

building. The resulting plan called for mounting the APs in the center of each conference room, 

immediately above the ceiling tiles. 

The design team wanted to segregate the APs from other network components to improve security and 

manageability. Unfortunately, the conference rooms were too far apart from each other to connect all of 

the APs to a dedicated WLAN hub or switch. Accordingly, in the network design, each AP was cabled to 

the nearest available switch, which typically reside in communications closets near each conference room. 

The switches were configured to place each port supporting an AP on a single enterprise VLAN. The 

VLAN spanned the entire building and behaved as if all the APs were on a single local network segment, 

thereby providing the desired isolation from the rest of the network. The VLAN was connected to the rest 

of the agency’s network through a router. To prevent WLAN users from reaching the StateConnect 

database, the plan specified an access control list (ACL) on the router that prohibited all traffic from any 

device on the WLAN to any servers supporting the database and vice versa. 

Everyone on the project team quickly agreed that RSN authentication should be based on IEEE 802.1X 

port-based access control rather than pre-shared keys, primarily because the administrative burden of 

managing pre-shared keys would likely overwhelm the IT support staff and the fact that PSK does not 

always uniquely authenticate the end node. On the other hand, determining which EAP method to use 

with IEEE 802.1X generated more debate. Several technicians wanted to implement the WLAN as 

quickly and painlessly as possible. They wanted to use the wireless client support bundled with the 

operating system common to all of the agency’s client computers. Then they argued that the logon 

9-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

servers (called domain controllers) supporting file, print, and messaging services should also serve as the 

ASs in the WLAN solution. This proposal suggested the use of PEAP with MS-CHAPv2 as the inner 

method. MS-CHAPv2 is a challenge-response method with characteristics similar to MD5-Challenge but 

with better security. 

Unlike the IT support staff, the project manager and information security officer emphasized security over 

administrative convenience. They wanted authentication to involve a client PKI certificate. The agency 

was planning to deploy an enterprise PKI in six weeks, which would involve certificates on all agencyowned computers, including desktops, laptops, handheld devices, and servers. The WLAN project was an 

excellent application for the new PKI and would quickly demonstrate its value. The decision was made to 

integrate the WLAN with the PKI, which would cause a short project delay, but one that was believed 

well worth the slip in the schedule. This approach led to the decision that EAP-TLS would be the best 

choice. Fortunately, the existing domain controllers could also serve as the ASs for the WLAN in this 

configuration, so the IT support staff accepted this element of the design. 

Once the project team completed the design documentation, the next step was to procure equipment. The 

results of the site survey demonstrated a need for 24 enterprise APs (three for each of the large conference 

rooms, and 18 for the remaining conference rooms). Based on the selected design, no need existed for 

additional WLAN client software, switches, or AS infrastructure beyond what was already in-house. The 

agency sought APs that were WPA2-Enterprise certified and FIPS-validated for the AES encryption 

module used in the CCMP data confidentiality and integrity protocol. The agency also wanted a means 

for physically securing the reset button on the APs to help prevent tampering. The search resulted in two 

candidates, until a member of the project team realized that one of the two products was FIPS-validated 

for the IPsec AES implementation on its wired interface, but not for the CCMP implementation on its 

wireless interface. This attention to detail was critical in identifying appropriate WLAN components. 

A member of the team created a network design diagram to help guide the subsequent implementation 

process. The result of that effort is presented in Figure 9-1. 

9-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 9-1. Agency XYZ WLAN

9-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

9.1.3 Phase 3: Implementation 

When the APs arrived, the IT group was just completing its PKI rollout. Each of the APs was similarly 

configured with the following: 

 A common SSID to support roaming across the enterprise 

 IEEE 802.1X pass-through, enabling the ASs to perform authentication transactions 

 Disabling WEP and TKIP to prevent connections using a data confidentiality and integrity 

protocol other than CCMP 

 IPsec tunnels with each AS to protect authentication and key distribution traffic on the wired 

network 

 Forwarding of AP-generated security events to the enterprise audit server for analysis and realtime intrusion detection. 

Each client computer (or STA) was updated with new configuration settings using a combination of logon 

scripts and enterprise management software. The configuration was relatively complex, requiring that the 

STA specify the following: 

 The SSID of the agency’s enterprise WLAN 

 The use of IEEE 802.1X port-based access control 

 EAP-TLS as the authentication method 

 The names of each AS that could perform the authentication transaction 

 The CA certificate used to verify the AS certificate’s digital signature 

 The client certificate used to authenticate the STA to the AS. 

The secure configuration is invoked for the SSID of the enterprise WLAN only. Each user can still 

configure additional SSIDs for connections to hotspots at hotels, conferences, and elsewhere. Personal 

firewall software on each laptop ensures that other hotspot users cannot gain unauthorized access. The 

laptop also automatically launches VPN client software for remote connections to the enterprise network, 

which may be occurring over insecure wireless links. 

Finally, technicians configured each domain controller to serve as an AS by doing the following: 

 Ensuring that the server was hardened against possible attack, which included installing all 

current patches as required by vulnerability management policy, and reviewing the system’s 

configuration against the organization’s security policies and server security configuration 

baseline 

 Establishing IPsec connections with each AP to protect authentication and key distribution traffic 

on the wired network 

 Forcing use of EAP-TLS to support WLAN authentication. 

Before users were allowed to use the WLAN, they were required to complete a 20-minute, Web-based 

WLAN security awareness course. The course covered important aspects of the WLAN use policy, 

including not letting people other than employees and full-time on-site contractors use the WLAN, and 

9-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

not accessing the StateConnect database over the WLAN. The course also provided several tips and 

tricks regarding how to protect one’s computer when using non-agency WLANs, such as those found at 

home, hotels, and coffee shops. For example, users were instructed to verify that their personal firewall 

software was running and their antivirus and anti-spyware software was up-to-date whenever they used 

their computers outside of the office. Without this type of protection, data stored locally on an agency 

laptop could be compromised if the laptop were used on an external network. Also, users could 

inadvertently download viruses, spyware, and other malware that otherwise would have been blocked by 

the agency’s network-based security controls. 

9.1.4 

9.1.5 

Phase 4: Operations/Maintenance 

Security was also integrated into regular operations behind the scenes. Personnel in the agency’s 

Network Operations Center were trained on how to respond to security alerts issued by the log analysis 

tool on the audit server that received data from each of the APs. Also, on a random day of each month, a 

technician would walk through the entire building using a laptop-based detection tool to identify 

unauthorized wireless services (APs and clients), rogue devices, and interfering devices intruding on the 

IEEE 802.11 channels. The agency was considering the procurement of a wireless intrusion detection 

system that can identify such devices automatically, but the budget did not allow for such a system in the 

initial deployment. 

Summary and Evaluation 

Six months after the deployment of the WLAN, the project team received a special service award from 

the director of the agency. When announcing the award, the director noted the project management 

approach to integrating WLANs into the agency’s existing IT services. Stakeholders were involved early 

in the process, and the solution was driven by clearly defined policy and functional requirements. The 

procurement process led to the selection of appropriate equipment that met all security requirements. 

Both users and support staff received relevant training related to the new system. The introduction of the 

IEEE 802.11 RSN at agency XYZ was a huge success. 

9.2 Case Study 2: Transitioning an Existing WLAN Infrastructure to RSN Technology 

A few days after the new CIO arrived at the Bureau of Advanced Research (BAR), she was confronted 

with a serious security breach: an intruder had compromised a key database containing confidential 

business information, and then posted sensitive records on a Web server in a country that did not 

cooperate with U.S. law enforcement. The preliminary investigation traced the attack back to an 

unsecured AP that the Special Projects Division had installed for the use of its staff. The AP was placed 

next to a window and was clearly visible from the public parking lot below. Apparently an unauthorized 

party had exploited WLAN vulnerabilities and gained access to confidential data. In this situation, little 

hope existed of finding the perpetrator. 

The CIO knew that the bureau’s WLAN infrastructure needed a security upgrade immediately to prevent 

further breaches of bureau information systems. She read about IEEE 802.11 RSNs in the trade press and 

believed that this could be the solution to the bureau’s problem. One of her biggest challenges would be 

overcoming the fiercely skeptical nature of the bureau’s senior scientists, over whom she had little 

authority. Many of them worried that a centralized security solution would compromise their 

independence and unnecessarily restrict their scientific pursuits. The CIO had to make the transition as 

smooth as possible to avoid criticism that could undermine her future success. 

9-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

The team agreed that the need for immediate security coupled with the diversity of equipment and 

configurations meant that an upgrade could not happen in one step; there would need to be an interim 

solution before they could upgrade to the end state. 

9.2.1 Phase 1: Initiation 

The first step was to inventory the existing WLAN infrastructure, which had grown without a cohesive 

plan or tight configuration management. A survey found that computers with WLAN client software 

could support TKIP (although few were using it), while only a few could support CCMP. The IT 

department managed four ESSs and two BSSs collectively supported by 14 APs with varying capabilities 

and security configurations. The ESS that supported the IT department used a RADIUS-based AAA 

server for authentication based on smart cards with PKI certificates. The smart card solution also 

provided physical access control for the server room and logical access control for several network 

management consoles. Figure 9-2 depicts the network prior to the migration. Table 9-1 lists a summary 

of the AP inventory for Figure 9-2. 

9-7
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 9-2. BAR WLAN Infrastructure Prior to Transition Effort 

9-8
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 9-1. BAR WLAN Components Prior to Transition Effort 

AP BSS/ESS 

SSID 

Existing Data 

Confidentiality 

Protocol 

Existing 

Authentication 

Wi-Fi Alliance 

Network 

Security 

Certification 

Supported Users 

1 WLAN1 None Open None Biomedical 

2 WLAN1 None Open None Biomedical 

3 WLAN1 None Open WPA2-Enterprise Biomedical 

4 GC WEP PSK WPA-Personal General Counsel 

5 GC WEP PSK WPA-Personal General Counsel 

6 GC WEP PSK WPA-Enterprise General Counsel 

7 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X with 

EAP-TLS WPA-Enterprise IT Support 

8 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X with 

EAP-TLS WPA-Enterprise IT Support 

9 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X with 

EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise IT Support 

10 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X with 

EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise IT Support 

11 PROJECT None Open WPA-Personal Special Projects 

12 PROJECT None Open WPA-Personal Special Projects 

13 JANE WEP PSK None Media Center 

14 LAB CCMP PSK WPA2-Personal Chemistry Lab 

The CIO put together a tiger team of top support professionals and a customer advocate who was very 

familiar with the technical requirements and politics of each office in the bureau. The team began by 

establishing a long-term vision for the BAR WLAN: an RSN using IEEE 802.1X port-based access 

control and CCMP for data confidentiality and integrity. The team agreed that the need for immediate 

security coupled with the diversity of equipment and configurations meant that an upgrade could not 

happen in one step; it would be evolutionary. There would need to be an interim solution before they 

could upgrade to the desired configuration. 

The team drafted a WLAN use policy that was approved by the bureau’s Change Management Board 

soon thereafter. The policy stated that WLAN communication within the bureau’s network would be 

based on RSNAs only. Authentication would, at a minimum, be based on a user name and password, 

although pre-shared key authentication would be permitted for an interim period of 120 days. Those 

requiring WLAN support not based on RSNAs would be required to operate in a perimeter network 

separated from the main network by a firewall. The WLAN would be limited to users who possessed 

valid badges to the facility, including visiting scholars, interns, and contractors. Finally, the WLAN 

could be used for any business activity also permitted on the wired network. 

9.2.2 The Interim Solution: Acquisition/Development and Implementation 

To plan the transition, the team decided to develop the interim strategy for each BSS or ESS in the current 

infrastructure. Factors they considered included the functional capability of the current equipment, the 

extent to which impacted users were familiar with WLAN key management, and the willingness of the 

impacted users to accept change. They also consulted several NIST publications to guide them in their 

planning effort, including NIST SP 800-53, Recommended Security Controls for Federal Information 

Systems. The result of their strategy session was a matrix similar to Table 9-2. 

9-9
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 9-2. Interim WLAN Strategy for BAR 

BSS/ESS 

SSID “As Is” Assessment Interim “To Be” Solution Long-Term Considerations 

WLAN1 

- No security 

- AP1 and AP2 must be 

replaced because they 

do not support upgrades 

- AP3 can be used in longterm solution because of 

WPA2-Enterprise 

certification 

- Users insist on continued 

use of WLAN regardless 

of security posture 

- AP placed near window 

- Place ESS on perimeter 

network outside the firewall 

- Require users to use client 

VPN software to access 

internal network resources 

- AP placed near the center of 

the cubicle area, away from 

windows and walls 

- Move ESS back to internal 

network once newly procured 

WPA2-Enterprise equipment 

is in place 

- Use password 

synchronization or single 

sign-on technology to reduce 

users’ concerns over burden 

of new security measures 

- Disallow TKIP 

GC 

- WEP provides 

inadequate security 

- All equipment can 

support TKIP but not 

CCMP 

- AP4 and AP5 cannot 

support IEEE 802.1X 

solution because WPAPersonal equipment uses 

PSK approach only 

- Users already 

comfortable with use of 

PSKs because they are 

deployed in existing WEP 

configuration 

- Configure APs to use TKIP 

with PSKs 

- Establish a temporary 

Transition Security Network 

(TSN) that permits both WEP 

and TKIP associations 

- Help users to transition to 

TKIP 

- Once it is verified that all 

STAs are using TKIP, remove 

WEP support to establish an 

RSN 

- TSN should be operational for 

as short a period as possible, 

preferably no more than 72 

hours 

- Procure new WPA2-

Enterprise APs to support 

long-term solution 

- Disallow TKIP 

BAR 

- ESS is already an RSN 

using IEEE 802.1X 

- RSN is based on TKIP, 

not CCMP, which is 

required in the long-term 

solution 

- AP7 and AP8 are not 

able to support CCMP 

and need to be replaced 

- Smart cards provide high 

level of authentication 

assurance 

- Keep as is - Replace AP7 and AP8 with 

new WPA2-Enterprise APs 

- Continue to support smart 

cards in long-term solution if 

feasible 

- Disallow TKIP 

9-10
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

BSS/ESS 

SSID “As Is” Assessment Interim “To Be” Solution Long-Term Considerations 

PROJECT 

- No security 

- APs can support TKIP, 

but not IEEE 802.1X or 

CCMP 

- Users unfamiliar with 

PSKs but are receptive to 

security enhancements, 

especially since their 

ESS was the source of 

the major breach 

- Configure APs and STAs to 

use TKIP with PSKs 

- Familiarize users with new 

technology 

- Replace AP11 and AP12 with 

new WPA2-Enterprise APs 

- Disallow TKIP 

JANE 

- WEP provides 

inadequate security 

- AP13 could support TKIP 

with a firmware flash 

upgrade 

- Users already 

comfortable with use of 

PSKs because they are 

deployed in existing WEP 

configuration 

- Upgrade software to code 

that supports WPA Personal 

- Replace WPA2-Personal AP 

with new WPA2-Enterprise 

AP 

- Disallow TKIP 

LAB 

- ESS is already an RSN 

using CCMP with PSK 

- AP cannot support IEEE 

802.1X 

- Keep as is - Replace WPA2-Personal AP 

with new WPA2-Enterprise 

AP 

- Disallow TKIP 

In conjunction with the changes, the upgraded BSSs were consolidated into a new ESS with the SSID 

INTERIM, which used TKIP with PSKs. Since the WLAN1 ESS could not be upgraded immediately, it 

was migrated outside of the internal network. The BAR and LAB WLANs remained “as is” because they 

both already met interim security requirements. 

The interim solution allowed the project team to quickly implement reasonable security measures without 

interrupting service or purchasing new equipment or software, while moving towards the long-term high 

assurance solution. Once they implemented the interim changes, the WLAN infrastructure appeared as 

depicted in Figure 9-3. The specifications of each AP in the interim infrastructure are listed in Table 9-3. 

9-11
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 9-3. BAR WLAN Interim Solution 

9-12
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 9-3. AP Specifications in BAR WLAN Interim Solution 

AP BSS/ESS 

SSID 

Interim Data 

Confidentiality 

Protocol 

Interim Authentication 

Wi-Fi Alliance 

Network Security 

Certification 

Supported Users 

1 WLAN1 None Open None Biomedical 

2 WLAN1 None Open None Biomedical 

3 WLAN1 None Open WPA2-Enterprise Biomedical 

4 INTERIM TKIP PSK WPA-Personal General Counsel 

5 INTERIM TKIP PSK WPA-Personal General Counsel 

6 INTERIM TKIP PSK WPA-Enterprise General Counsel 

7 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X 

with EAP-TLS WPA-Enterprise IT Support 

8 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X 

with EAP-TLS WPA-Enterprise IT Support 

9 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X 

with EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise IT Support 

10 BAR TKIP IEEE 802.1X 

with EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise IT Support 

11 INTERIM TKIP PSK WPA-Personal Special Projects 

12 INTERIM TKIP PSK WPA-Personal Special Projects 

13 INTERIM TKIP PSK WPA-Personal Media Center 

14 LAB CCMP PSK WPA2-Personal Chemistry Lab 

9.2.3 The Long-term Solution: Acquisition/Development and Implementation 

With the interim solution in place, the next stage of the project was to move from the interim solution to 

the long-term solution. There were three major challenges, as follows: 

 Migrate to a centralized authentication infrastructure 

 Replace all the APs that were not WPA2-Enterprise certified and therefore could not support 

CCMP with IEEE 802.1X port-based access control 

 Install common client software on all STAs. 

With regard to the first challenge, the team was divided as to the approach, with advocates for each of the 

following proposals: 

 Procure a proprietary security policy and key management solution 

 Expand the EAP-TLS smart card solution to the entire bureau 

 Use the existing RADIUS-based AAA server with EAP-TTLS and MD5-Challenge as the inner 

EAP method. 

The proprietary solution involved agent software on each STA that would periodically obtain a new PSK 

from a central management server. Proponents of this approach stated that establishing RSNAs based on 

PSKs was much faster than doing so with IEEE 802.1X and EAP. The team heard sales presentations 

from several vendors and eventually narrowed on a product suite from Acme Networks. Acme’s product 

suite included a number of productivity-enhancing management tools, including graphical displays of the 

9-13
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

WLAN topology with real-time statistics on performance problems and outages. However, the 

proprietary solution was the most expensive of the options and could constrain future upgrade options, 

which would frustrate some of the bureau’s most influential users. 

Smart card supporters argued that it was the most secure of the options because it used two-factor 

authentication. Moreover, the bureau already had hands-on experience with it, having used it for some 

time to support the IT staff. Members of this group were worried that an enterprise WLAN solution could 

weaken the security of the IT infrastructure if the IT staff were compelled to give up their smart cards. 

The disadvantages to this approach were that the user community might reject the smart cards as overly 

cumbersome, and that the cards added a significant expense to the project and subsequent operations. 

The third group felt the authentication infrastructure needed to be as transparent to users as possible to be 

accepted readily. Users were used to entering a username and password to access their e-mail, so they 

should be able to remember a similar combination for authentication to the WLAN. They recommended 

using EAP-TTLS with MD5-Challenge as the inner EAP method. The AAA server could support this 

configuration and also communicate using Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) with the 

directory server that stored the e-mail security credentials. 

The issue was brought before the CIO for resolution. She rejected the proprietary solution because of its 

cost. She then successfully brokered a compromise between the second and third groups. Users outside 

of the IT department would authenticate using their e-mail username and password. The IT staff would 

also use this system, but would continue to use their smart cards for access to the management network. 

The SSID of the enterprise ESS would be BAR1; the SSID of the ESS for the IT management network 

would be BAR2. A firewall between the enterprise user network and the IT management network would 

strictly limit the types of traffic that can flow between the two of them. 

The second challenge was to replace all of the APs that could not support IEEE 802.1X and CCMP. To 

prevent service disruptions, whenever a new AP was installed, it was configured to support both the old 

WLAN and the new one. Users were given 60 days to migrate to the new WLAN. 

The third challenge was to deploy new WLAN client software on each STA. The IT staff was surprised 

at the diversity of STAs in their environment and knew that finding RSN client support for all of them 

would be difficult. The STAs included UNIX, Linux, and Windows computers; two types of personal 

digital assistants (PDA); six printers; and some smart phones with integrated IEEE 802.11g interfaces. 

The project team identified a software product that could support EAP-TTLS on UNIX, Linux, Windows, 

and one of the PDA types, but none of the printers or smart phones. Another product was found for the 

other PDA type; wireless print servers were found to support the printers. 

No support was available for the smart phones, which could support WEP only. Despite the commitment 

to maintain WLAN service for all users, it was decided that the security of the enterprise could not be 

compromised for the convenience of a handful of users with IEEE 802.11-capable smart phones. These 

users were told that they would have to find alternative methods of connecting to the WLAN (e.g., using a 

PDA). 

Several of the original APs did not support CCMP and could not be used in the final solution. This 

equipment was outdated and no longer of value to the organization. Before donating the equipment to a 

local elementary school, a technician cleared all keys and network addresses from the devices to avoid 

revealing any information about the bureau’s network to external parties. 

9-14
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 9-4 shows how the WLAN infrastructure appeared at the completion of the project. Table 9-4 lists 

additional configuration information for the APs in the end-state solution. At this point, all of the APs are 

WPA2-Enterprise certified and are configured to use CCMP and IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. 

9-15
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 9-4. BAR WLAN at Completion of RSN Migration Project 

9-16
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Table 9-4. BAR WLAN at Completion of RSN Migration Project 

AP BSS/ESS 

SSID 

Data 

Confidentiality 

Protocol 

Authentication 

Wi-Fi Alliance 

Network Security 

Certification 

Supported 

Users 

1 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise 

2 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise 

3 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise 

Biomedical 

4 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise 

5 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise 

6 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise 

General Counsel 

BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS 

7 

BAR2 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise 

BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS 

8 

BAR2 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise 

BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS 

9 

BAR2 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise 

BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS 

10 

BAR2 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TLS WPA2-Enterprise 

IT Support 

11 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise 

12 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise Special Projects 

13 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise Media Center 

14 BAR1 CCMP IEEE 802.1X with EAP-TTLS WPA2-Enterprise Chemistry Lab 

9.2.4 Summary and Evaluation 

The transition was a great success, in large part because the project team did not try to reach an ideal state 

in one step. Instead, it developed both interim and long-term solutions. The interim solution was 

designed to respond quickly to an active threat. Someone had recently seriously compromised network 

security and could easily have done so again unless immediate measures were taken to provide a defense 

against a subsequent attack. In this environment, the bureau did not have the time to procure equipment 

or develop a new authentication infrastructure. 

Fortunately, the organization was able to build an interim IEEE 802.11 RSN with existing equipment. In 

general, the deployment of PSKs significantly increases the administrative complexity of WLAN 

operations, primarily because of the need to periodically rotate keys, which is often a manual process. 

However, the use of PSKs in the interim solution enabled the bureau to protect its WLAN 

communications quickly, giving it the time to design and implement a long-term solution based on a 

centralized AS and IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. 

In the long-term solution, the bureau decided to leverage its existing RADIUS-based AAA server and 

integrate it with its LDAP-enabled e-mail directory. It also incorporated its existing smart card 

authentication system for its IT staff, who desired additional security for access to the bureau’s 

management network. This configuration meant the use of EAP-TTLS with MD5-Challenge passwordbased authentication for the ESS was available to all users, and EAP-TLS authentication was available for 

the IT support staff with additional authentication requirements. 

9-17
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

9.3 Case Study 3: Supporting Users Who Are Not Employees 

The General Regulatory Commission (GRC) was proud of the openness of its proceedings and had 

successfully used technology to improve its accessibility to the public. Last year, it won an award for its 

Web site that allows remote users to search through electronic records in its online docket. Recently, it 

decided to use technology to improve the experience of visitors to its headquarters in Washington, D.C. 

At the top of its list of project ideas was the installation of new WLAN technology. 

GRC’s Associate CIO for network engineering and operations had been considering deployment of IEEE 

802.11 RSN technology, but was not certain it was best-suited for all of GRC’s desired applications. He 

realized that cyber security threats were real and growing. While the commission embraced technology 

tools that help it to perform its public service mission, senior staff also knew they needed to balance 

public access and security. A significant security breach could undermine years of trust the commission 

had built with its stakeholders. 

9.3.1 Phase 1: Initiation 

The Associate CIO tasked his IT services contractor to develop a high-level strategy for the WLAN 

project, in particular analyzing what types of security controls were appropriate for its various 

components. A few days later, the contractor presented some preliminary ideas, which are shown in 

Table 9-5. 

Table 9-5. Proposed WLAN Architecture and Security Strategy 

Section of 

Building Users Potential WLAN Applications Suggested Approach Rationale / Discussion 

Commission 

Offices Employees 

Mobile access to 

office productivity 

tools (e-mail, 

Internet, etc.) 

- APs placed in conference 

rooms, employee 

cafeteria, and 

commissioners’ offices 

- Employees able to 

access office systems 

- ESS is IEEE 802.11 

RSNs using EAP-TLS 

and CCMP (SSID GRCOFFICE) 

- Employees seek 

standard office WLAN 

capabilities. 

- Commissioners want 

wireless capabilities for 

meetings in their offices. 

9-18
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Section of 

Building Users Potential WLAN Applications Suggested Approach Rationale / Discussion 

Administrative 

Law Courts 

Attorneys, 

reporters, 

experts/ 

witnesses, 

employees 

Access to: 

- Court 

proceedings/ 

transcripts 

- Calendaring 

system 

- Evidence 

information 

repository 

- Both employees and 

non-employees receive 

PKI-enabled access 

badges 

- Non-employee access to 

court systems is rolebased 

- Employees able to 

access both court and 

office systems 

- Each hearing room has 

WPA2-Enterprise AP 

supporting two ESS: 

 1. SSID GRC-COURT 

 2. SSID GRC-OFFICE 

- ESSs are IEEE 802.11 

RSNs using EAP-TLS 

and CCMP 

- Lawyers and reporters 

have already registered 

credentials with the court. 

- Court proceedings are 

significantly expedited 

when external parties can 

connect to some of the 

court’s information 

systems and their own 

office systems during 

hearings. 

- Members of the public do 

not have access, but this 

is not a requirement in 

the hearing room. 

- Employees need more 

access than others, and 

should be able to roam 

seamlessly from the 

commission offices to the 

hearing rooms. 

- Data communications 

require security because 

some sessions of the 

court are closed to the 

public and involve 

confidential business 

information. 

Public 

Information 

Resource 

Center 

Scholars, 

students, 

reporters, 

interested 

citizens, 

employees, 

researchers 

Access to: 

- Public 

 Internet 

- GRC 

 electronic 

 docket 

- Library 

 holdings 

 database 

- Public WLAN placed 

outside GRC firewall 

(SSID GRC-PUBLIC) 

- Open system 

authentication with no 

confidentiality 

- Connection to Internet 

throughput-limited on 

each WLAN channel 

- Firewall and logging 

solutions help prevent 

and log abuses 

- Issuing authentication 

credentials to visitors is 

administratively 

burdensome. 

- Protecting the 

confidentiality of public 

information has minimal 

security value. 

- Internet connectivity 

improves research 

productivity, but 

throughput is limited on 

each channel to prevent 

abuse. 

The first step in the initial assessment was recognizing that there were essentially three main areas that 

could benefit from WLAN services: 

 The commission offices, in which employees conducted their day-to-day business 

 The administrative law courts, in which registered attorneys, reporters, and expert witnesses 

needed limited access to court information systems and the ability to access their own office 

servers. Opposing attorneys’ traffic should be isolated from each other, to avoid even the 

appearance of eavesdropping. 

9-19
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 The Public Information Resource Center, in which the GRC wanted to offer access to the 

Internet, the GRC electronic docket, and the library holdings database to all visitors. 

The security requirements for each of these areas differed from the others. The simplest case was the 

commission offices. The requirements there were very similar to those of most other organizations whose 

WLANs served employees only; meeting areas such as conference rooms and the cafeteria should support 

mobile users, but do so with RSN protections to protect the confidentiality and integrity of GRC 

information resources. 

The administrative law courts had special requirements, necessitating more rapid access to information. 

Court proceedings often took far longer to complete than one would expect. For example, whenever 

someone requested information that was not readily available, the lawyers had to request a recess so that a 

courier could bring relevant data to the court from wherever it might reside. Determining when to restart 

a hearing was itself a challenge; all the parties involved had to submit forms specifying their availability, 

which the court’s clerk would use to schedule subsequent appearances. 

Allowing authorized individuals access to IT systems from within the hearing rooms could greatly reduce 

these delays. Attorneys could quickly search through the court’s archives or evidence information 

repository to respond to queries. They could also use VPN technology to access information from 

external sources, such as the offices of their law firms. In addition, they could enter their schedules into 

the court’s calendaring system, so that when proceedings were stopped, the clerk could immediately 

notify all parties when they would resume. This functionality required network support. WLAN 

technology could provide that support unobtrusively, while also giving users a degree of mobility within 

each room. 

One possibility was to permit anyone to use the hearing room WLAN since, for the most part, 

proceedings were public. This configuration was rejected for two reasons. First, proceedings were closed 

when cases involved sensitive business information, and much of the court’s calendar and its evidence 

information repository also were confidential. Second, the judges felt that public visitors to the court 

should not be permitted to use the WLAN for anything other than official court business, which would be 

difficult to control if they could easily access its network. For these reasons, an RSN solution was 

deemed appropriate for the hearing rooms and the commission offices. 

The final area in which a WLAN would be deployed is the GRC’s Public Information Resource Center, 

which was used by the public, ranging from local university students writing term papers to commission 

staff checking records related to regulatory actions. Librarians in the center noted that many visitors to 

the center were frustrated by the lack of Internet access. This situation forced them to leave the center to 

access information from external resources, sometimes necessitating several trips. A WLAN with 

Internet access could solve this problem while also facilitating access to the center’s resources. 

The IT security manager was concerned that public users would abuse their free network privileges, either 

using them to attack the network or simply dominate the available bandwidth to such an extent that it 

would crowd out other legitimate uses of the network. He argued for RSN protections to prevent this 

abuse. However, closer examination of the problem revealed that an RSN was unlikely to solve the 

potential problems he raised. If members of the public were permitted to use the WLAN on the desired 

walk-in basis, they could cause problems regardless if they did so on an open system or one on which 

they were given logon credentials to an RSN. Furthermore, because all the center information that would 

be accessed is publicly available, confidentiality was not an issue. In the case of the Public Information 

Resource Center, an RSN would add administrative complexity with little or no additional security 

benefit. 

9-20
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

9.3.2 Phase 2: Acquisition/Development 

Based on the IT service contractor’s initial analysis, the Associate CIO awarded a task to design the 

WLAN solution, which focuses on the development portion of the acquisition/development phase of the 

information system development life cycle. The initial planning had indicated that RSN technology could 

be useful in the commission offices and the administrative law courts, but was unnecessary in the Public 

Information Resources Center. The design would need to provide different levels of access to the 

commission’s employees, who for the most part needed full access, and the external parties participating 

in court proceedings, who needed only limited access. 

While the solution could accommodate this differentiation using identity management and authorization 

software only, the architects felt additional network controls would be required to provide a high level of 

assurance that the system would not be used improperly. Data traffic in the hearing rooms would be 

segregated from the main office network using a separate ESS with the SSIDs GRC-COURT and GRCOFFICE. GRC-COURT would support non-employees with GRC business, such as the attorneys 

participating in GRC hearings. GRC-OFFICE would support employees and have access to both the 

office network and the hearing room information resources. The APs in the commission offices would 

support GRC-OFFICE only. The APs in the hearing rooms would support both GRC-COURT and GRCOFFICE. Both GRC-COURT and GRC-OFFICE would use the same backend cluster of AAA servers 

for authentication. The system would be designed to work with any WPA2-certified client, but the 

hearing room would also have a spare open Ethernet connection for the occasional visitor that still 

encountered interoperability issues. 

The commission already had an enterprise PKI. The badges that both employees and non-employees 

carried to enter the building could hold PKI certificates that could be used for authentication. Certificate 

readers were already provided to all employees and could be provided to hearing room visitors on an asneeded basis. With a robust PKI already in place, EAP-TLS authentication was a good choice. Using the 

PKI to support the WLAN required some changes to the commission’s certificate policy and certification 

practice statement, but these were relatively minor (primarily involving adding WLAN components to the 

list of acceptable users of the PKI) and were implemented quickly. 

The ESS supporting the Public Information Resource Center would have the SSID GRC-PUBLIC. Its 

APs would be on a VLAN outside of GRC’s firewall, which would block all inbound access except 

requests to its electronic docket and library holdings database. The design also called for limiting the 

network throughput on each WLAN connection to 256 kilobits per second, which would allow 

individuals to perform external research but prevent them from dominating the Internet connection so that 

others would not be able to use it. This requirement was met using a proprietary quality of service feature 

available on the enterprise APs that the bureau procured for this project. The ability to support this 

limitation was added to the AP procurement requirements list to ensure that it could be implemented in 

the final solution. 

Figure 9-5 illustrates the design for the GRC WLAN infrastructure. 

9-21
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Figure 9-5. GRC WLAN Infrastructure 

9-22
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

9.3.3 Summary and Evaluation 

The case study reviewed GRC’s experience with the initiation and acquisition/development phases of the 

information systems development life cycle with respect to its WLAN deployment. The commission’s 

objective was to use WLAN technology to improve public access to its information. Its project got off to 

a strong start largely because it correctly identified when RSNs would facilitate progress towards that 

objective and when they might not. 

The initial GRC analysis led to a high-level design that tailored the RSN strategy for each area in the 

building based on the level of protection needed given the user community it served. In summary, GRC’s 

main building had three areas that would be supported by WLANs: the commission offices, the 

administrative law courtrooms, and the Public Information Resource Center. 

The solution in the commission offices was similar to WLAN deployments in many organizations, 

providing users with mobility they did not previously enjoy. The solution for the courtrooms, however, 

was innovative and greatly expedited the legal administrative processes with which many were frustrated. 

IEEE 802.11 RSN technology enabled this significant increase in productivity because the judges would 

not have permitted courtroom network connections without the assurance the RSN provided. 

The WLAN solution in the Public Information Resource Center also was an enabling technology, 

allowing visitors to complete research projects more efficiently than ever before. However, the solution 

was an open system, providing no link layer security. This configuration at first seemed precarious, but 

given that the Center’s data was public and its WLAN was isolated from other network resources with 

firewall technology, RSN protections were deemed unnecessary. 

9-23
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

9-24
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

10. Summary of Concepts and Recommendations 

This section summarizes the major concepts and recommendations presented in Sections 2 through 8 of 

this document. It provides a summary of the major IEEE 802.11 network components and terms, an 

overview of IEEE 802.11i security, and an introduction to the product certification programs from the 

Wi-Fi Alliance. It also discusses the operation of a Robust Security Network (RSN) and outlines a 

recommended life cycle for IEEE 802.11 RSN deployment. Finally, it provides additional 

recommendations for wireless local area network (WLAN) security. 

10.1 IEEE 802.11 Concepts 

WLANs usually are implemented as extensions to existing wired LANs, and are used by devices within a 

fairly limited range, such as an office building. The need for interoperability among different brands of 

WLAN products led to the development of various WLAN standards. IEEE 802.11 is the dominant 

WLAN standard. The basic IEEE 802.11 network components and architectural models are as follows: 

 Station (STA). A STA is a wireless endpoint device, such as a laptop, PDA, or mobile phone. 

 Access Point (AP). An AP logically connects STAs with a distribution system, which is 

typically an organization’s wired network infrastructure. APs can also logically connect wireless 

STAs with each other without accessing a distribution system. 

 Ad Hoc Mode. This is a wireless network configuration that does not use APs; STAs 

communicate directly with each other. 

 Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). An IBSS is a set of STAs configured in ad hoc mode. 

 Infrastructure Mode. This wireless network configuration requires APs and is the most 

commonly used mode for WLANs. An AP connects wireless STAs to each other or to a 

distribution system. 

 Basic Service Set (BSS). A BSS is composed of an AP and one or more STAs configured in 

infrastructure mode. A BSS is the basic building block of a WLAN. 

 Distribution System (DS). A DS is an infrastructure, typically a wired LAN, that connects 

individual BSSs to each other. 

 Extended Service Set (ESS). An ESS is a WLAN comprising more than one BSS connected by 

a DS. 

10.2 IEEE 802.11i Security Overview 

Also known as pre-RSN IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.11 technologies that rely on Wired Equivalent Privacy 

(WEP) have several well-documented security problems that can be exploited to circumvent or adversely 

impact access control and authentication, confidentiality, integrity, and availability. To address these, 

IEEE amended IEEE 802.11 with 802.11i, which was approved in July 2004. 

The IEEE 802.11i specification introduces the concept of a Robust Security Network (RSN), which is a 

wireless network that allows the creation of RSN associations (RSNA) only. RSNAs are logical 

connections between communicating IEEE 802.11 entities established through the IEEE 802.11i 4-Way 

Handshake. RSNAs allow for the protection of data frames and provide enhanced security relative to the 

flawed WEP. RSNAs provide the following security features for IEEE 802.11 WLANs: 

10-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Enhanced User and Message Authentication Mechanisms. The Extensible Authentication 

Protocol (EAP) provides the authentication framework for IEEE 802.11 RSNs that use IEEE 

802.1X port-based access control. To accomplish mutual authentication between an AP and a 

STA, the IEEE 802.1X standard defines an additional entity, an authentication server (AS). IEEE 

802.1X allows the client to authenticate to the network through the use of the AS. If the 

authentication succeeds, the AP receives the resulting Pairwise Master Key (PMK). 

EAP defines the stages of an EAP conversation that includes one or more EAP methods. The 

EAP methods perform the authentication transaction and generate cryptographic keying material. 

While the basic rules of the EAP conversation are common to all EAP implementations, the EAP 

methods can vary from one implementation to another, and EAP can be adapted to new 

authentication methods as they become available. This flexibility has benefits, but it may also 

introduce risk. Therefore, organizations should select EAP methods based on a risk assessment 

of the target environment. Only some EAP methods, such as certain Transport Layer Securitybased methods (e.g., EAP-TLS, EAP-Tunneled TLS [EAP-TTLS], Protected EAP [PEAP], can 

satisfy the security requirements for WLANs. 

Before organizations select WLAN equipment, they should review their existing identity 

management infrastructure, authentication requirements, and security policy to determine the 

EAP method or methods that are most appropriate in their environment, then purchase systems 

that support the chosen EAP methods. Many EAP methods are currently defined only in IETF 

Internet-drafts and thus are not yet official standards. Organizations are encouraged to obtain the 

latest available information before making final determinations on their IEEE 802.11 RSN 

authentication architecture and product procurement. 

 Cryptographic Key Management. RSNAs use several cryptographic keys to support key 

generation, encryption, authentication, and integrity functions. The IEEE 802.11i specification 

defines two key hierarchies for RSNAs: the Pairwise Key Hierarchy, which is designed for 

unicast data traffic protection, and the Group Key Hierarchy, which is intended for 

multicast/broadcast traffic protection. In the Pairwise Key Hierarchy, keys may be installed in 

RSNA devices (ASs and STAs) through two methods: 

– Delivering a pre-shared key (PSK) through an out-of-band mechanism. The IEEE 802.11 

standard does not specify how PSKs are to be generated or distributed, so these decisions are 

left to organizations implementing IEEE 802.11 networks. As a result, organizations should 

review any PSK approach carefully for possible vulnerabilities and evaluate its performance 

implications. Distributing PSKs in a large network might be infeasible. The lack of 

individual user/client authentication in most PSK APs is another reason to avoid the use of 

pre-shared keys. 

– Delivering an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) key through EAP during 

authentication. Decisions on the appropriate EAP authentication methods are left to 

organizations implementing STAs and ASs. As a result, organizations should carefully 

review any EAP authentication methods for possible vulnerabilities. 

Most organizations choose to implement EAP for authentication instead of using PSKs because 

of the resources needed for proper PSK administration. EAP authentication requires an 

organization to use an AS, which may necessitate the use of a public key infrastructure (PKI). 

Organizations that already have ASs for Web, e-mail, file and print services, and other 

authentication needs, should consider integrating this technology into their RSN solutions. Most 

leading network operating systems and directory solutions offer the support needed for RSN 

integration. 

10-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

 Robust Enciphering and Data Integrity Mechanisms. IEEE 802.11 defines WEP as a data 

confidentiality and integrity protocol. The IEEE 802.11i amendment defines two additional 

protocols for RSNAs: Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) and Counter Mode with Cipher 

Block Chaining Message Authentication Code Protocol (CCMP). Federal agencies are required 

to use Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)-approved cryptographic algorithms that 

are contained in FIPS-validated cryptographic modules. Of WEP, TKIP, and CCMP, only CCMP 

uses a core cryptographic algorithm that is FIPS-approved, the Advanced Encryption Standard 

(AES). For other security features, CCMP offers the same or stronger implementations than 

WEP and TKIP. Accordingly, NIST requires the use of CCMP for securing Federal agencies’ 

IEEE 802.11-based WLANs. For legacy IEEE 802.11 equipment that does not provide CCMP, 

auxiliary security protection is required; one possibility is the use of an IPsec VPN, using FIPSapproved cryptographic algorithms. 

IEEE 802.11i also uses a function known as IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. The IEEE 802.1X 

framework specified by the IEEE 802.11i amendment provides the means to block user access to the DS 

until authentication is successful, thereby controlling access to network resources. The technique used to 

block access is known as port-based access control; it involves the AP distinguishing between EAP and 

non-EAP frames, then passing EAP frames through an uncontrolled port and non-EAP frames through a 

controlled port, which can block access. 

10.3 Wi-Fi Alliance Product Certification Programs 

The Wi-Fi Alliance has established several certification programs to give consumers of WLAN products 

assurance that their systems comply with IEEE 802.11 specifications and can interoperate with similar 

equipment from other vendors. The following certifications are available that indicate product 

compliance with IEEE 802.11i: 

 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), which includes a subset of the IEEE 802.11i specification that 

addresses the weaknesses of WEP 

 WPA2, which extends WPA to include the full set of IEEE 802.11i requirements. 

Federal agencies should procure WPA2 products that have been FIPS-validated; WPA products cannot be 

FIPS-validated because they do not support FIPS-approved encryption algorithms. WPA and WPA2 

have both Personal and Enterprise modes of operation. Organizations that plan to deploy authentication 

servers as part of an IEEE 802.1X and EAP implementation should procure products with the Enterprise 

level certification. 

10.4 IEEE 802.11 RSN Operation 

IEEE 802.11 RSN operation is based on a frame exchange protocol used to transfer frames between 

WLAN components—STAs, APs, and ASs. The protocol uses three types of IEEE 802.11 frames, as 

follows: 

 Data frames, which encapsulate upper layer protocol packets, including user data (e.g., e-mail, 

Web pages). 

 Management frames, which include the management of association and deassociation activities, 

authentication, probes, and beacons. 

 Control frames, which are used for requesting and controlling access to the wireless media, such 

as sending an acknowledgement after receiving a data frame. 

10-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

By grouping the frame exchanges within the frame exchange protocol by function, IEEE 802.11 RSN 

operation may be thought of as occurring in five distinct phases: 

 RSN Operation Phase 1: Discovery. The STA identifies an AP for a WLAN with which it 

wishes to communicate. The STA locates an AP either by receiving one of the AP’s periodic 

transmissions of Beacon frames, or by sending a Probe Request to solicit a Probe Response from 

an AP. After the STA has identified an AP, the STA and the AP exchange frames to negotiate 

various parameters for their communications. By the end of the phase, the STA and AP have 

agreed on an authentication method. 

 RSN Operation Phase 2: Authentication. During this phase, the STA and AS prove their 

identities to each other. The authentication frames pass through the AP, which also blocks nonauthentication traffic from the STA using IEEE 802.1X port-based access control. The actual 

authentication mechanism is implemented by the STA and AS using EAP. EAP provides a 

framework that allows the use of multiple methods for achieving authentication, including static 

passwords, dynamic passwords, and public key cryptography certificates. After authentication 

has been completed, the AAA key is installed in the STA and AS. It serves as a root key to 

enable the generation of other keys used to secure communications between the STA and AP. 

 RSN Operation Phase 3: Key Generation and Distribution (KGD). During the KGD phase, 

the AP and the STA perform several operations that cause cryptographic keys to be generated and 

placed on the AP and the STA. The KGD phase employs two handshakes: a 4-Way Handshake 

and a Group Key Handshake. During the 4-Way Handshake, the STA and AP establish a security 

policy that specifies several key security capabilities, such as data confidentiality and integrity 

protocols for protecting data traffic, and a key distribution approach. Both handshakes employ 

message encryption and integrity checking, using one of two confidentiality and integrity 

algorithms. For both types of handshakes, NIST requires the use of AES Key Wrap with HMACSHA-1-128 instead of RC4 encryption with HMAC-MD5 because AES and SHA-1 are FIPSapproved algorithms, and RC4 and MD5 are not. Selecting CCMP as the cipher suite will ensure 

the use of the appropriate key wrap algorithms. 

 RSN Operation Phase 4: Protected Data Transfer. The STA and AP share data securely, 

using the security policy and cryptographic keys established during the first three phases. 

Because secure data transfer occurs between the STA and the AP only, organizations need to 

consider carefully the security of the data during the rest of its transit (e.g., on the DS). 

 RSN Operation Phase 5: Connection Termination. During this phase, the STA and AP tear 

down their secure connection and delete their association, thereby terminating their wireless 

connection. 

The outcome of the discovery phase is very important to the security posture of a WLAN. In an RSN, an 

AP should not associate with pre-RSN STAs. If any STAs in a WLAN are using pre-RSN capabilities 

(e.g., WEP or IEEE 802.11 entity authentication), then those STAs have associations that are not RSNAs. 

Accordingly, the WLAN is not an RSN, even though many of its STAs might not be using pre-RSN 

capabilities. Organizations that want to establish IEEE 802.11 RSNs should configure their APs so that 

they permit the establishment of RSNAs only, not associations based on pre-RSN capabilities. 

Alternatively, non-RSN STAs should be limited to a separate VLAN where additional controls (e.g. 

firewalls and FIPS 140-2 validated VPNs) can be applied. 

10-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

10.5 Life Cycle for IEEE 802.11 RSN Deployment 

To be effective, WLAN security should be incorporated throughout the life cycle of WLAN solutions, 

from policy to operations. The model described in this section is based on one introduced in NIST SP 

800-64, Security Considerations in the Information System Development Life Cycle. Organizations may 

follow a project management methodology or life cycle model that does not directly map to the phases in 

the model presented in this guide, but the types of tasks in the methodology and their sequencing are 

probably similar. The phases of the life cycle are the following: 

 Deployment Phase 1: Initiation. This phase includes the tasks to be performed before starting 

the design of a WLAN solution. These include providing an overall vision for how the WLAN 

would support the mission of the organization, creating a high-level strategy for the WLAN’s 

implementation, developing a WLAN use policy, and specifying business and functional 

requirements for the solution. 

 Deployment Phase 2: Acquisition/Development. For the purposes of this guide, the 

Acquisition/Development phase is split into the following two parts: 

– Phase 2a: Planning and Design. In this phase, WLAN network architects specify the 

technical characteristics of the WLAN solution and related network components. These 

characteristics include the EAP method or methods used to support authentication; the 

protocols used to support communication between client, AP, and AS; access control lists 

and firewall rules to segregate WLAN traffic; and the nature of the supporting PKI. A site 

survey is typically conducted to help determine the architecture of the solution. 

– Phase 2b: Procurement. This phase involves specifying the number and type of WLAN 

components that must be purchased, the feature sets they must support, and any certifications 

they must hold. It may also include procuring client upgrades to support the security policies 

to be enforced in the WLAN deployment. 

 Deployment Phase 3: Implementation. In this phase, procured equipment is first configured to 

meet operational and security requirements, and then it is installed and activated on a production 

network. Implementation includes altering the configuration of other security controls and 

technologies, such as security event logging, network management, AAA server integration, and 

PKI. 

 Deployment Phase 4: Operations/Maintenance. This phase includes security-related tasks that 

should be performed on an ongoing basis once the WLAN is operational, including log review 

and rogue AP detection. 

 Deployment Phase 5: Disposition. This phase encompasses tasks that occur after a system or its 

components have been retired, including preserving information to meet legal requirements, 

sanitizing media, and disposing of equipment properly. 

10.6 Additional WLAN Security Recommendations 

In addition to the recommendations presented throughout Sections 3 through 7 of this document, Section 

8 provides over 50 best practice recommendations for WLAN security, grouped by the life cycle phase 

for which each recommendation is most relevant.122 Organizations are strongly encouraged to adopt the 

“best practice” recommendations. Failure to implement them significantly increases the risk of a WLAN 

 

122 For the sake of brevity, the recommendations are not duplicated in this section. Readers should consult Tables 8-1 through 

8-6 for the recommended best practices for each life cycle phase. 

10-5
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

security breach. Organizations should also examine each of the “should consider” recommendations to 

determine their applicability to the target environment. In general, “should consider” recommendations 

enhance security beyond what can be achieved through the “best practice” recommendations. A “should 

consider” recommendation should be rejected only if it is infeasible or if the reduction in risk from its 

implementation does not justify its cost. 

WLANs face several types of high-level threats, including denial of service attacks, eavesdropping, manin-the-middle attacks, masquerading, message modification, message replay, and traffic analysis. WLAN 

threats most commonly involve an attacker with access to the radio link between two STAs or between a 

STA and an AP. Implementing the recommendations presented in this guide for a new or existing 

WLAN should help to provide reasonable assurance that an organization is protected against most WLAN 

security threats. In addition, organizations should use guidance on general security controls, such as the 

recommendations presented in NIST SP 800-53 for minimum management, operational, and technical 

security controls for information systems. 

10-6
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

11. Future Directions 

As the IEEE 802.11 protocol is used in increasingly diverse and demanding environments, additional 

requirements appear that necessitate extensions to the IEEE 802.11i security measures. Timelines for 

these, and other 802.11 standards, can be found at 

http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/802/11/Reports/802.11_Timelines.htm. Currently, there are two IEEE 

802.11 Working Groups that are addressing security-related standards. 

11.1 IEEE 802.11r: Fast Roaming/Fast BSS Transition 

When an IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN is used to support the connection to a voice terminal, each time a 

wireless device moves enough to require a transition from one AP to another, this necessitates a new 

authentication exchange as well as another 4-Way Handshake. These exchanges can result in latency 

severe enough to cause a call to be dropped or at the very least to appear unresponsive. Even the use of 

Pre-Authentication and PMKSA caching are not enough to solve this problem. IEEE 802.11 Task Group 

R was formed to define a secure mechanism that will enable more rapid transitions. Completion of the 

IEEE 802.11r standard is targeted for March 2007. 

11.2 IEEE 802.11w: Protected Management Frames 

IEEE 802.11i added effective security protections to IEEE 802.11 wireless communications. However, 

those protections are only provided for data frames exchanged by a STA and an AP. This leaves another 

category of communications, management frames, vulnerable to attack and manipulation by unauthorized 

parties. Those management frames that are exchanged before authentication and key establishment take 

place cannot be protected, since the requisite security mechanisms have not yet been put into place. Other 

management frames (e.g., deauthentication and disassociation) could make use of the IEEE 802.11 RSNA 

for protection. Without this protection, an adversary could inject these management frames, causing a 

STA to be unwillingly removed from the wireless network. Defining the mechanisms to provide this 

protection is the motivation behind the formation of IEEE 802.11 Task Group W. 802.11w has gone to 

letter ballot, the first major milestone in becoming a standard; completion of the IEEE 802.11w standard 

is targeted for March 2008. 

11-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

11-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Appendix A—Acronyms 

Selected acronyms used in Establishing Wireless Robust Security Networks: A Guide to IEEE 802.11i are 

defined below. 

AAA Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting 

AAAK Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting Key 

AAD Additional Authentication Data 

ACL Access Control List 

AES Advanced Encryption Standard 

AKM Authentication and Key Management 

AP Access Point 

AS Authentication Server 

ATIM Announcement Traffic Indication Message 

AVP Attribute-Value Pair 

BSS Basic Service Set 

BSSID Basic Service Set Identifier 

CA Certification Authority 

CBC Cipher Block Chaining 

CBC-MAC Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code 

CCM Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) Message Authentication Code (MAC) 

CCMP Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) Message Authentication Code (MAC) 

Protocol 

CHAP Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol 

CIO Chief Information Officer 

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check 

DA Destination Address 

DS Distribution System 

EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 

EAP-FAST Extensible Authentication Protocol Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling

EAP-TLS Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security

EAP-TTLS Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security 

EAPOL Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LAN

EAPOL-KCK Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LAN Key Confirmation Key

EAPOL-KEK Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LAN Key Encryption Key

EMSK Extended Master Session Key 

ESS Extended Service Set 

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute 

FCS Frame Check Sequence 

FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards 

FISMA Federal Information Security Management Act 

FMS Fluhrer-Mantin-Shamir 

GHz Gigahertz 

GMK Group Master Key 

GRS General Records Schedule 

A-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

GTC Generic Token Card 

GTK Group Temporal Key 

HIPERLAN High Performance Radio Local Area Network 

HMAC Hash Message Authentication Code 

IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority 

IBSS Independent Basic Service Set 

ICV Integrity Check Value 

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force 

IKE Internet Key Exchange 

IP Internet Protocol 

IPsec Internet Protocol Security 

ITL Information Technology Laboratory 

IV Initialization Vector 

Kbps Kilobit per second 

KGD Key Generation and Distribution 

LAN Local Area Network 

LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 

MAC Media Access Control 

MAC Message Authentication Code 

Mbps Megabit per second 

MD Message Digest 

MHz Megahertz 

MIC Message Integrity Code 

MOU Memorandum of Understanding 

MS-CHAP Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol 

MSK Master Session Key 

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit 

NIC Network Interface Card 

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology 

NTP Network Time Protocol 

OMB Office of Management and Budget 

OTP One-Time Password 

PAC Protected Access Credential 

PDA Personal Digital Assistant 

PEAP Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol 

PIN Personal Identification Number 

PKI Public Key Infrastructure 

PMK Pairwise Master Key 

PMKSA Pairwise Master Key Security Association 

PN Packet Number 

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol 

PRF Pseudo-Random Function 

A-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

PSK Pre-shared Key 

PTK Pairwise Transient Key 

PUB Publication 

RA Receiver Address 

RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service 

RFC Request for Comment 

RSN Robust Security Network 

RSNA Robust Security Network Association 

RSNIE Robust Security Network Information Element 

SA Source Address 

SHA Secure Hash Algorithm 

SHS Secure Hash Standard 

SIM Subscriber Identity Module 

SiPS Signal Processing System 

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 

SP Special Publication 

SSH Secure Shell 

SSID Service Set Identifier 

SSL Secure Sockets Layer 

STA Station 

TA Transmitter Address 

TK Temporal Key 

TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol 

TLS Transport Layer Security 

TSC TKIP Sequence Counter 

TSN Transition Security Network 

TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security 

USB Universal Serial Bus 

UWB Ultrawideband 

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 

VPN Virtual Private Network 

WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 

Wi-Fi Wireless Fidelity 

WLAN Wireless Local Area Network 

WMAN Wireless Metropolitan Area Network 

WMM Wi-Fi Multimedia 

WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access 

WPAN Wireless Personal Area Network 

WWAN Wireless Wide Area Network 

A-3
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

This page has been left blank intentionally. 

A-4
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Appendix B—References 

Altunbasak, Hayriye and Owen, Henry, “Alternative Pair-wise Key Exchange Protocols for 

Robust Security Networks (IEEE 802.11i) in Wireless LANs”, IEEE SOUTHEASTCON, 2004. 

Anderson, Gustave et al, “A Secure Wireless Agent-based Testbed”, Proceedings of the Second 

IEEE International Information Assurance Workshop, 2004. 

Baghaei, Nilufar and Hunt, Ray, “IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Security Performance Using 

Multiple Clients”, Proceedings of the 12th IEEE International Conference on Networks, 2004. 

Bargh, Mortaza et al, “Fast Authentication Methods for Handovers Between IEEE 802.11 

Wireless LANs”, Proceedings of the 2nd ACM International Workshop on Wireless Mobile 

Applications and Services on WLAN Hotspots, 2004. 

Becker, Bernd, Eisinger, Jochen, and Winterer, Peter, “Securing Wireless Networks in a 

University Environment”, Proceedings of the Third IEEE International Conference on Pervasive 

Computing and Communications Workshops, 2005. 

Carli, Marco, Neri, A., and Rossetti, A., “Integrated Security Architecture for WLAN”, 

Proceedings of the IEEE 10th International Conference on Telecommunications, 2003. 

Chen, Jyh-Cheng, Jiang, Ming-Chia, and Liu, Yi-Wen, “Wireless LAN Security and IEEE 

802.11i”, IEEE Wireless Communications, February 2005. 

Chen, Jyh-Cheng, Liu, Yi-Wen, and Wang, Yu-Ping, “Design and Implementation of WIRE1x”, 

Proceedings of Taiwan Area Network Conference, 2003. 

Edney, Jon and Arbaugh, William A., Real 802.11 Security: Wi-Fi Protected Access and 802.11i, 

Addison-Wesley, 2004. 

Fluhrer, Scott, Mantin, Itsik, and Shamir, Adi, “Weaknesses in the Key Schedule Algorithm of 

RC4”, Proceedings of the 4th Annual Workshop on Selected Areas of Cryptography, 2001. 

Gast, Matthew S., 802.11® Wireless Networks: The Definitive Guide (2nd Edtion), O’Reilly 

Media, 2005. 

He, Changhua, and Mitchell, John, “Analysis of the 802.11i 4-Way Handshake”, Proceedings of 

the 2004 ACM Workshop on Wireless Security, 2004. 

IEEE Standard 802.11, 1999 Edition. Also available at 

http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.11-1999.pdf. 

IEEE Standard 802.11i, 2004 Edition. Also available at 

http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.11i-2004.pdf. 

IEEE Standard 802.1X, 2004 Edition. Also available at 

http://standards.ieee.org/getieee802/download/802.1X-2004.pdf. 

B-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Matsunaga, Yasuhiko et al, “Secure Authentication System for Public WLAN Roaming”,

Proceedings of the First ACM International Workshop on Wireless Mobile Applications and 

Services on WLAN Hotspots, 2003.

Mitsuyama, Yukio et al, “Embedded Architecture of IEEE 802.11i Cipher Algorithms”, 

Proceedings of the IEEE International Symposium on Consumer Electronics, 2004. 

O’Hara, Bob and Petrick, Al, IEEE 802.11 Handbook: A Designer’s Companion, IEEE Press, 

2001. 

Schmoyer, Tim, Lim, Yu-Xi, and Owen, Henry, “Wireless Intrusion Detection and Response: A 

Case Study Using the Classic Man-in-the-middle Attack”, Proceedings of IEEE Wireless 

Communication and Networking Conference 2004, 2004. 

Smyth, Neil, McLoone, Máire, and McCanny, John, “Reconfigurable Hardware Acceleration of 

WLAN Security”, IEEE Workshop on Signal Processing Systems (SiPS) Design & 

Implementation, 2004. 

Šorman, Matija, Kovač, Tomislav, and Maurović, Damir, “Implementing Improved WLAN 

Security”, 46th International Symposium Electronics in Marine, 2004. 

Wool, Avishai, “A Note on the Fragility of the ‘Michael’ Message Integrity Code”, IEEE 

Transactions on Wireless Communications, Vol. 3 No. 5, September 2004. 

You, Liyu and Jamshaid, Kamran, “Novel Applications for 802.11x Enabled Wireless Networked 

Home”, 2004 IEEE Consumer Communications and Networking Conference, 2004. 

B-2
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Appendix C—Online Resources 

This section lists online resources that may be helpful for better understanding IEEE 802.11 RSNs and the 

IEEE 802.11i amendment. 

Documents 

Name URL 

Deploying Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPATM) and 

WPA2TM in the Enterprise 

http://www.wi-fi.org/white_papers/whitepaper-022705-

deployingwpawpa2enterprise/

EAP Registry http://www.iana.org/assignments/eap-numbers

FIPS 140-2, Security Requirements for Cryptographic 

Modules

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips140-2/fips1402.pdf

FIPS 180-2, Secure Hash Standard (SHS) http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips180-2/fips180-

2withchangenotice.pdf 

FIPS 197, Advanced Encryption Standard http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips197/fips-197.pdf

FIPS 199, Standards for Security Categorization of 

Federal Information and Information Systems

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips199/FIPS-PUB199-final.pdf 

GRS 24, Information Technology Operations and 

Management Records 

http://www.archives.gov/records-mgmt/ardor/grs24.html 

Michael: An Improved MIC for 802.11 WEP http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/802/11/Documents/Docum

entHolder/2-020.zip 

NIST SP 800-30, Risk Management Guide for 

Information Technology Systems

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-30/sp800-

30.pdf 

NIST SP 800-32, Introduction to Public Key 

Technology and the Federal PKI Infrastructure

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-32/sp800-

32.pdf

NIST SP 800-40 version 2, Creating a Patch and 

Vulnerability Management Program

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-40-

Ver2/SP800-40v2.pdf 

NIST SP 800-41, Guidelines on Firewalls and Firewall 

Policy

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-41/sp800-

41.pdf 

NIST SP 800-48, Wireless Network Security: 802.11, 

Bluetooth and Handheld Devices

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-

48/NIST_SP_800-48.pdf

NIST SP 800-50, Building an Information Technology 

Security Awareness and Training Program

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-50/NISTSP800-50.pdf 

NIST SP 800-52, Guidelines for the Selection and Use 

of Transport Layer Security (TLS) Implementations

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-52/SP800-

52.pdf 

NIST SP 800-53 Revision 1, Recommended Security 

Controls for Federal Information Systems

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-53-

Rev1/800-53-rev1-final-clean-sz.pdf 

NIST SP 800-63, Electronic Authentication Guideline http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-63/SP800-

63V1_0_2.pdf 

NIST SP 800-64, Security Considerations in the 

Information System Development Life Cycle

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-64/NISTSP800-64.pdf 

NIST SP 800-70, Security Configuration Checklists 

Program for IT Products – Guidance for Checklists 

Users and Developers

http://checklists.nist.gov/docs/SP_800-70_20050526.pdf 

NIST SP 800-77, Guide to IPsec VPNs http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-77/sp800-

77.pdf 

NIST SP 800-94, Guide to Intrusio n Detection and 

Prevention Systems (IDPS) 

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-94/SP800-

94.pdf 

C-1
ESTABLISHING WIRELESS ROBUST SECURITY NETWORKS: A GUIDE TO IEEE 802.11I

Name URL 

The DoD Public Key Infrastructure and Public KeyEnabling Frequently Asked Questionshttp://iase.disa.mil/pki/faq-pki-pke-may-2004.doc

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Enhanced Security 

Implementation Based on IEEE P802.11i standard, 

Version 3.1

http://www.wi-fi.org/OpenSection/protected_access.asp

(obtained from a link on this site for a fee) 

Resource Sites 

Name URL 

FIPS-validated Cryptographic Modules http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/

IEEE 802.11 working group information http://grouper.ieee.org/groups/802/11/QuickGuide_IEEE_802_WG_a

nd_Activities.htm

International Engineering Consortium http://www.iec.org/online/tutorials/eap_methods/

NIST’s Security Configuration Checklists 

Program for IT Products 

http://csrc.nist.gov/pcig/ 

SNMP http://www.snmp.com/snmpv3/

Wi-Fi Alliance http://www.wi-fi.org/ 

Wi-Fi Alliance Certified WLAN Systems http://www.wi-fi.org/OpenSection/certification_programs.asp?TID=2 

Request for Comment (RFC) Documents 

Name URL 

RFC 1994, PPP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1994.txt 

RFC 2104, HMAC: Keyed-Hashing for Message Authentication http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2104.txt 

RFC 2243, OTP Extended Responses http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2243.txt

RFC 2246, The TLS Protocol, Version 1.0 http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2246.txt

RFC 2284, PPP Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2284.txt

RFC 2289, A One-Time Password System http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2289.txt

RFC 2716, PPP EAP TLS Authentication Protocol http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2716.txt

RFC 2828, Internet Security Glossary http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2828.txt 

RFC 2865, RADIUS http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2865.txt

RFC 2869, RADIUS Extensions http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2869.txt

RFC 3394, Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Key Wrap Algorithm http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3394.txt 

RFC 3546, Transport Layer Security (TLS) Extensions http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3546.txt 

RFC 3579, RADIUS Support for EAP http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3579.txt

RFC 3580, IEEE 802.1X Remote Authentication Dial In User Service 

(RADIUS) Usage Guidelines 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3580.txt

RFC 3588, Diameter Base Protocol http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3588.txt 

RFC 3610, Counter with CBC-MAC (CCM) http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3610.txt 

RFC 3748, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3748.txt

RFC 4017, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method Requirements 

for Wireless LANs 

http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4017.txt

RFC 4306, Internet Key Exchange (IKEv2) Protocol http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4306.txt 

C-2